IMPEDANCE ANALYZER

ZA57630
INSTRUCTION MANUAL(BASICS)NF Corporation

DA00068820-003

IMPEDANCE ANALYZER

ZA57630
INSTRUCTION MANUAL(BASICS)

Registered Trademarks
National Instruments, LabVIEW, and Measurement Studio are registered trademarks of National
Instruments Corporation in the United States.
WINDOWS® EMBEDDED 8.1 INDUSTRY PRO
Used with permission from Microsoft.
Other company names and product names used in this instruction manual may be trademarks orregistered trademarks of their respective companies.

Copyright
NI Measurement Studio
Copyright (C) 2019 National Instruments Corporation
All Rights Reserved.

──── Preface ────Thank you for purchasing the "ZA57630 IMPEDANCE ANALYZER".
For safe and correct use of this product, please read the "Safety Precautions" section that follows
before attempting to use this instrument.
■ Marks and symbols
For safe operation by the user and to prevent damage to this instrument, please give attention to thefollowing marks and symbols that are used in this manual.
！

WARNING
This mark indicates information for preventing the possibility of death or serious
personal injury from electrical shock or other hazards or damage to this instrumentin the use or handling of this instrument.

！ CAUTION
This mark indicates information for preventing the possibility of injury to the user or
damage to this instrument and the use for handling of this instrument.
■ The scope of this ManualThis manual describes the ZA57630 that conform to requirements of CE marking.
Products without CE marking affixed, may not meet directives for CE marking (EMC and others).
Please confirm the CE marking is affixed on the rear panel.

i

ZA57630

Preface The manuals provided for the ZA57630 are listed below.
●

Instruction manual (Basics)
This manual describes operation of the ZA57630 from this instrument’s control panel,specifications, and other basic matters.
If you’re using this equipment for the first time, begin reading from Chapter 1.

●

Instruction manual (Advanced)
This manual describes more advanced operation and maintenance.

●

Instruction manual (Remote Control)
This manual describes remote control of the ZA57630

Basics
1. Introduction
This chapter provides a general description of this instrument, including its features,
applications, functions, and basic operating principles.
2. Preparation before use
This chapter describes important preparation that must be done before operating this
instrument.
3. Panel operations
This chapter explains the function, operating procedure, default values, and measurement
values for each part of the display screen. Read this chapter for a quick overall understandingof the panel and its use.
4. Basic operation
This chapter explains the basic operating procedures of the ZA57630. Refer to this chapter as
you use this instrument.
5. Specifications
This chapter describes this instrument specifications (functions and performance).
Advanced
1. Advanced operation
This chapter explains a wider range of operations.
2. File formats
This chapter explains the various file formats for saving data in external storage devices(USB memory device).
3. TroubleshootingThis chapter describes how to deal with error messages and cases in which you think th isinstrument is malfunctioning.
4. MaintenanceThis chapter explains maintenance, repacking, transportation, and performance testing
methods.

ii

ZA57630──── Safety Precautions ────For safe use of this product, give full attention to the following warnings and cautions.
The NF Corporation shall not be held liable for damages that arise from failure to observe these warnings
and cautions.
This product is a Class I device (with protective conductor terminal) that conforms to the IEC insulation
standards.
Be sure to observe the instructions in the instruction manual.
This instruction manual contains information for the safe operation and use of this product.
Read the instructions and information before using the product.
All of the warning items contained in this instruction manual are intended to avoid risks that may leadto serious accidents. Follow the warnings and instructions carefully.



Be certain that the product is properly grounded.
This product uses a line filter which may cause electric shock if the product is not grounded.
To prevent electrical shock accidents, connect the product to an earth ground so that ground resistanceis 100 Ω or less.
This product is automatically grounded by connecting a 3-pin power plug to a power outlet with aprotective ground contact.

Check the power supply voltage.
This instrument operates on the power source voltage described in "2.3 Grounding and Power
Connections".
Before plugging in the power cord, confirm that the outlet voltage conforms to the rated voltage ofthis instrument.



If you think something is wrong, ...
If smoke or an unusual odor or sound comes from this instrument, immediately remove the power
cord from the socket and cease use of this instrument.
If any such abnormality occurs, take measures to prevent the use of this instrument until repairs havebeen completed and promptly contact the NF Corporation or its authorized agent.

Do not use this product when gas is present.
Operating this instrument in the presence of flammable gases may cause an explosion.

Do not open the product case.
To prevent exposure to high voltages, never remove the cover of this instrument.
Only technicians certified by the NF Corporation are authorized to inspect or touch anything inside
the product case.

iii

ZA57630

Safety Precautions


Do not modify this product.
Never modify this product in any way. Modification might create new risks. The NF Corporation may
refuse to service an instrument that has an unauthorized modification.



Do not expose this product to water.
Use of this product when it is wet may result in electrical shock or fire. If this instrument becomes wet,
immediately unplug the power cord and contact the NF Corporation or its authorized agent.



If lightning occurs nearby, turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord.
A lightning strike may cause electrical shock, fire, or instrument malfunction.

Safety-related symbols
The marks and codes defined below are used in this manual or on this instrument itself to indicate
safety information or instructions.
Instruction manual reference symbolThis notifies the user of a potential hazard and indicates that the user mustrefer to the instruction manual.

！

Electric shock danger symbolThis symbol indicates a location that presents a risk of electric shock under
specific conditions.

！ WARNING

Warning symbolThis contains information to avoid risks when handling the equipment that
could result in the death or serious injury of the operator.

！ CAUTION

Caution symbolThis contains information to avoid risks when handling the equipment that
could result in minor or moderate injury of the operator or damage toproperty.

Other symbols
Indicates that the "ON" position of the power switch
Indicates the "OFF" position of the power switch
Indicates that the outer conductor of the connector is connected to this instrument
enclosure.

42Vpk

Indicates that the outer conductor of the connector is isolated from this instrument enclosure.
However, safe operation of this instrument requires that the potential difference from thegrounding potential is restricted to 42 Vpk or less.

This product is grounded when in use, so the electrical potential of this instrument enclosure is equal to
the ground potential.

iv

ZA57630

Safety Precautions
Electromagnetic compatibility
This product is a CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A compliant instrument. It should not be used outsideindustrial environments. Use of this product in ordinary office or residential areas may result inelectromagnetic interference with other devices.



Disposal of this productTo protect the environment, follow the guidelines described below for the disposal of this product.
a) This device is equipped with a lithium battery. Use the services of an industrial waste disposal
contractor to dispose of such batteries.
b) The LCD backlight module that is used in this product does not contain mercury.
c) Use the services of an industrial waste disposal contractor for disposal of the entire product.

v

ZA57630

Contents
Page
1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Features ........................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Applications ...................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Operating Principle ........................................................................................................... 1-4
2. Preparation before Use............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Checking before Use ........................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2 Assembly and Installation ................................................................................................. 2-4
2.3 Grounding and Power Supply Connection ..................................................................... 2-10
2.4 Simple Operation Check ................................................................................................ 2-12
2.5 Calibration ...................................................................................................................... 2-13
3. Panel Operations ..................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Functions and Operations of Panel Parts ......................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Input and Output Connectors ........................................................................................... 3-8
3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens................................................................................ 3-19
3.4 Operation Tree ............................................................................................................... 3-32
3.5 Setting Screen Reference .............................................................................................. 3-42
3.6 Initial Settings ................................................................................................................3-111
4. Basic Operations ..................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Display and Operation when Power Is Turned On............................................................ 4-2
4.2 Simple Operation for First Time Use ................................................................................ 4-5
4.3 Setting Measurement Signals......................................................................................... 4-13
4.4 Measurement Controls ................................................................................................... 4-18
4.5 Setting Sweep Measurement ......................................................................................... 4-19
4.6 Setting Spot Measurement ............................................................................................. 4-25
5. Specifications........................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Measurement Modes........................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2 Measurement Value Display Ranges ............................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT) .......................................... 5-5
5.4 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−3T) ............................................. 5-8
5.5 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−2T) ........................................... 5-11
5.6 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode G−PH) ................................................ 5-14
5.7 Measured Signal Control Section ................................................................................... 5-18
5.8 Measurement Accuracy .................................................................................................. 5-20
5.9 Measurement Processing Section .................................................................................. 5-31
5.10 Display Section ............................................................................................................ 5-35

vi

ZA57630

Contents
5.11 Memory ....................................................................................................................... 5-36
5.12 External Memory ......................................................................................................... 5-36
5.13 External Input/Output Function .................................................................................... 5-37
5.14 Miscellaneous Specifications ....................................................................................... 5-39

vii

ZA57630

Figures and Tables
Page
Figure 1-1

Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 1-4

Figure 2-1

Rack Mount Kit Assembly Drawing (JIS) ................................................................. 2-6

Figure 2-2

Rack Mount Kit Assembly Drawing (EIA) ................................................................. 2-7

Figure 2-3

Rack Mount Dimensions (JIS) ................................................................................. 2-8

Figure 2-4

Rack Mount Dimensions (EIA) ................................................................................. 2-9

Figure 3-1

Front Panel .............................................................................................................. 3-2

Figure 3-2

Rear Panel ............................................................................................................... 3-3

Figure 3-3 Functions of Measurement Connectors(Measurement Modes IMPD−EXT and G−PH) ...................................................... 3-8
Figure 3-4 Functions of Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode: IMPD−3T) ............... 3-9
Figure 3-5 Functions of Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode: IMPD−2T) ............. 3-10
Figure 3-6 Function of DC BIAS OUT Connector .................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-7 Function of 10 MHz REF IN Connector .................................................................. 3-12
Figure 3-8 Function of 10 MHz REF OUT Connector .............................................................. 3-13
Figure 3-9

Handler Interface Connector Pin Assignment Diagram .......................................... 3-14

Figure 3-10 Equivalent Circuit of Handler Interface................................................................... 3-17
Figure 3-11

AUX Connector Pin Assignment Diagram ............................................................ 3-17

Figure 3-12

I/O Connector Equivalent Circuit of AUX Connector ............................................ 3-18

Figure 3-13

Screen Immediately after Startup......................................................................... 3-19

Figure 3-14

Status Display Area.............................................................................................. 3-19

Figure 3-15

Measurement Condition Display Area.................................................................. 3-20

Figure 3-16

Basic Menu Operation Area ................................................................................. 3-21

Figure 3-17

Marker Display Area ............................................................................................ 3-21

Figure 3-18

Marker Operation Area ........................................................................................ 3-21

Figure 3-19

Menu Display Example ........................................................................................ 3-23

Figure 3-20

Switching Menu (Top Menu) ................................................................................ 3-23

Figure 3-21

Menu Layer Operation ......................................................................................... 3-24

Figure 3-22

Function Keys ...................................................................................................... 3-24

Figure 3-23

Numerical Settings (Immediate Settings) ............................................................. 3-25

Figure 3-24

Numerical Settings............................................................................................... 3-26

Figure 3-25

List Operations (Immediate Settings) ................................................................... 3-27

Figure 3-26

Palette Operations (Immediate Settings) ............................................................. 3-27

Figure 3-27

Text Settings (Immediate Settings) ...................................................................... 3-28

Figure 3-28

Switching Text Input Palette ................................................................................. 3-29

Figure 3-29

Execution Operations (Requiring Confirmation)................................................... 3-30

viii

ZA57630

Figures and Tables
Figure 3-30

Graph Display Styles ........................................................................................... 3-30

Figure 4-1 Impedance Measurement Connection Example 1(IMPD−EXT, Measurement of High Voltage) ................................................................. 4-6
Figure 4-2 Impedance Measurement Connection Example 2(IMPD−EXT, Measurement of DUT with Grounding) .............................................. 4-7
Figure 4-3 Impedance Measurement Connection Example 3(IMPD−EXT, Measurement of High-Impedance DUT) ............................................ 4-7
Figure 4-4 Impedance Measurement Connection Example 4 (IMPD−3T) ................................... 4-9
Figure 4-5 How to Check Operation Using 100 Ω RESISTOR (IMPD−3T) ................................ 4-10
Figure 4-6 Impedance Measurement Connection Example 5 (IMPD−2T) ................................. 4-11
Figure 4-7 Gain and Phase Measurement Connection Example ............................................... 4-12
Figure 5-1 External dimensions ................................................................................................. 5-40

ix

ZA57630

Figures and Tables

Table 2-1 Packing list ................................................................................................................... 2-2
Table 3-1 Handler Interface Signal Layout ................................................................................. 3-14
Table 3-2 Handler Interface Signal Functions ............................................................................ 3-15
Table 3-3 AUX Connector Signal Layout ................................................................................... 3-17
Table 3-4 Initial Settings (1/12) ................................................................................................ 3-111
Table 4-1 Display Modes (Measurement Mode: IMPD−EXT / IMPD−3T / IMPD−2T) ................ 4-20
Table 4-2 Display Modes (Measurement Mode: G−PH) ............................................................ 4-21
Table 4-3 Graph Axis Parameters (Measurement Mode: IMPD−EXT / IMPD−3T / IMPD−2T)... 4-21
Table 4-4 Graph Axis Parameters (Measurement Mode: G−PH) ............................................... 4-22
Table 4-5 Display Parameter Conversion Formulas(Measurement Mode: IMPD−EXT / IMPD−3T / IMPD−2T) ................................... 4-23
Table 4-6 Display Parameter Conversion Formulas (Measurement Mode: G−PH) .................... 4-24

x

ZA57630

1. Introduction

1.1

Features .............................................................................. 1-2

1.2

Applications ......................................................................... 1-3

1.3

Operating Principle .............................................................. 1-4

1.3.1 Operating Principle ........................................................ 1-4
1.3.2 Measurement Modes ..................................................... 1-6

1-1

ZA57630

1.1 Features

1.1 Features
The “ZA57630 IMPEDANCE ANALYZER” is an impedance analyzer with a maximum
frequency of 36 MHz, maximum signal amplitude of 3 Vrms, maximum DC bias of ±40 V, andmaximum sweep speed of 0.5 ms/point. It has a high basic accuracy of 0.08 % and is capableof measuring impedance in a wide application range that extends to not only the
manufacturing and inspection lines of electronic components but also the research ofmaterials.
(1) Measurement frequency of 10 µHz to 36 MHz
This instrument can measure at a 10 µHz resolution in the entire range. It is also
capable of the detailed measurement of the impedance-frequency characteristics of adevice under test (DUT) with a sharp resonance.
(2) Maximum signal amplitude of 3 Vrms and maximum DC bias of ±40 V
The characteristics of a DUT can be measured in wide signal amplitude and bias voltage
ranges.
(3) High-speed measurement at 0.5 ms/point
Sweeping is possible at up to 0.5 ms/point (during frequency sweeping). This instrument
can thus contribute to the improvement of efficiency in research and development andthe shortening of tact time on manufacturing lines.
(4) Two types of measurement ports provided
This instrument is equipped with two types of measurement ports. There are thethree-port type (BNC connectors) that can be used with various test fixtures forgeneral-purpose LCR meters and the coaxial-port type (N connector) for performing
stable measurement at a high frequency. The port for measurement can be switcheddepending on the application.
(5) Measurement signals can be amplified using a power amplifier
The impedance characteristics of a DUT can be measured using large signals by
amplifying the measurement signal output of this instrument using a power amplifier.
This enables impedance characteristics to be measured under conditions close to actual
usage conditions for piezoelectric actuators used at high power and inductors, capacitors,
and other components for power electronics.
(6) Resonant frequency tracking measurement
The resonance frequency fluctuations of piezoelectric vibrators and other devices can betracked automatically. Impedance measurement can also be performed while the DUT isdriven at the optimum frequency regardless of the variations in load and ambient
temperature.
1-2

ZA57630

1.2 Applications(7) Remote control
This instrument can be incorporated in manufacturing lines and measurement systems
because it is equipped with USB, GPIB, RS-232, LAN, and handler interfaces asstandard.
(8) Capable of measuring gain and phase characteristics
In addition to impedance characteristics, this instrument can measure the transfer
characteristics (gain and phase characteristics) of filters, amplifiers, etc.

1.2 Applications● Inspection, sorting, and evaluation testing on the manufacturing lines of electronic
components such as inductors, capacitors, and sensors.
● Evaluation and research of magnetic materials and dielectrics.
● Evaluation of C-V characteristics of MEMS and semiconductor devices.
● Use in combination with a power amplifier for measurement of the impedance
characteristics of inductors and capacitors for power electronics, piezoelectric motors, andpiezoelectric vibrators.
● Measurement of the impedance characteristics of electrolytes, dielectric materials, andsolutions at micro voltage and current levels by using a high sensitivity voltage
preamplifier and current-voltage conversion amplifier.

1-3

ZA57630

1.3 Operating Principle

1.3 Operating Principle
1.3.1 Operating Principle
The ZA57630 applies a sine wave signal from an internal measurement signal source to thedevice under test (DUT). It then detects current I flowing through the DUT and voltage V
applied to the DUT, performs discrete Fourier transform (DFT), and calculates impedance Z(= V/I) of each analysis frequency component from the obtained Fourier coefficient obtained
through the DFT. Parameters such as inductance L, capacitance C, and resistance R are
calculated from the impedance (magnitude and phase angle).

+

HCUR
OSC
HPOT
PORT1
LPOT

～
o

DC BIAS
OUT

OSC
CONTROL

10 MHzREF IN

A/D

LCUR
PORT2

10 MHzREF OUT

DFT
A/D

PORT3

HANDLER
INTERFACE

MEASUREMENT BLOCK

AUX～ LINEVGA
POWER
SUPPLYUI CPU

USB−A
LCD
PANEL

USB−B
GPIB
REMOTE IF
LAN
RS−232

Figure 1-1

1-4

Block Diagram

ZA57630

1.3 Operating Principle
The impedance and phase angle at the measurement frequency are obtained with one
measurement. Impedance frequency characteristics like a Bode diagram can be obtained bymeasuring the gain and phase angle while sweeping the measurement signal source
oscillator (OSC) and measurement frequency. This instrument can measure the amplitudedependence and DC bias dependence of each impedance since it can also sweep the AC signal
amplitude and DC bias in addition to the frequency.
a) MEASUREMENT BLOCK
The measurement block consists of a signal generation section to supply a signal formeasurement to the DUT, voltage detection section, current detection section, and DFT
section to calculate impedance.
The signal generation section has a setting resolution of 10 µHz for the range of 10 µHz to
36 MHz based on the direct digital frequency synthesizer technology.
The current of the LCUR connector is converted to a voltage and then A/D conversion and DFT
calculation are performed to calculate the current vector (magnitude and phase angle). The
voltage vector is also calculated by performing A/D conversion and DFT calculation for thevoltage applied to the DUT. The impedance (magnitude and phase angle) of the DUT is
calculated by dividing the voltage vector by the current vector and then various error
corrections are made and the result is transferred to the UI CPU section.
b) UI CPU CKTThis displays the measurement data obtained by the measurement block on the LCD invarious graph formats. It also outputs measurement commands to the measurement block inaccordance with the settings from the front panel or a remote interface. The USB-A
connector is located on the front panel and is used for connecting a USB memory device.
c) POWER SUPPLY CKTThis supplies various power required by the measurement bock in addition to power for
digital section control.
d) REMOTE IF CKTThis performs communication with an external controller, such as outputting various
settings and measurement data. It converts between the communication protocols of the
GPIB, USB, RS-232, and LAN general interfaces and the internal communication protocol of
UI CPU CKT. The USB-B connector is located on the rear panel and is used for connectingwith a PC to control this instrument.

1-5

ZA57630

1.3 Operating Principle

1.3.2 Measurement Modes
This instrument has four measurement modes to use depending on the measurement purpose.
● Measurement mode IMPD−EXT
Impedance measurement mode
Current-voltage conversion needs to be performed externally.
DUT drive amplifier, probe, etc. can be used.
● Measurement mode IMPD−3T
Impedance measurement mode
Test fixture and test leads for LCR meters can be used.
● Measurement mode IMPD−2T
Impedance measurement mode
Stable measurement at high frequency is possible using an N
connector.
● Measurement mode G−PH
Gain-phase measurement mode
For measuring transfer characteristics of filters and amplifiers
The connector to use for measurement differs depending on the measurement mode setting.
・IMPD−EXT，IMPD−3T，G−PH：HCUR/OSC, HPOT/PORT1, LCUR/PORT2・IMPD−2T：PORT3○ Connection example for measurement mode IMPD−EXT
ZA57630PORT3HCUR / OSC
HPOT / PORT1
LPOTLCUR / PORT2

DUT drive amplifier
Voltage probe

V

DUT

I

Current probe○ Connection example for measurement mode IMPD−3T
ZA57630
ZA57630
PORT3

PORT3
Test fixture

HCUR / OSC
HPOT / PORT1
LPOTLCUR / PORT2

100 Ω RESISTOR(accessory)

HCUR / OSC
HPOT / PORT1
LPOTLCUR / PORT2

DUT(Connection example for operation check)

1-6

ZA57630

1.3 Operating Principle○ Connection example for measurement mode IMPD−2T
ZA57630
PORT3DUT
HCUR / OSC
HPOT / PORT1
LPOTLCUR / PORT2○ Connection example for measurement mode G−PH
ZA57630
PORT3
Equipment under test (EUT)
HCUR / OSC
HPOT / PORT1
LPOTLCUR / PORT2

1-7

ZA57630

(Blank)

1-8

ZA57630

2. Preparation before Use

2.1

Checking before Use ........................................................... 2-2

2.2

Assembly and Installation.................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 General Precautions for Installation ............................. 2-4
2.2.2 Installation Conditions .................................................. 2-4
2.2.3 Rack Mounting ............................................................. 2-5

2.3

Grounding and Power Supply Connection ........................ 2-10

2.4

Simple Operation Check ................................................... 2-12

2.5

Calibration ......................................................................... 2-13

2-1

ZA 57630

2.1 Checking before Use

2.1 Checking before Use■ Checking safety
To ensure safety, refer to “Safety Precautions” at the beginning of this instruction manual andcarry out safety checks before using this instrument.
In addition, read “2.3 Grounding and Power Supply Connection” before connecting to the power
supply and carry out sufficient safety checks before connecting this instrument to a powersource.
■ Checking appearance and accessories
If you notice something abnormal on the outside of the cardboard box (such as a scratch ordent), closely check that the product is not affected when you remove it from the box.
When you have removed the contents from the cardboard box, check them.
If you find a scratch on the product or an accessory is missing, report the problem to NF
Corporation or its authorized agent.
○ Checking appearance
Check that there is no scratch or dent on the panel surfaces, controls, connectors, etc.
○ Checking accessories
The accessories of this instrument are as follows. Check that the quantities are correct andthere is no scratch.
Table 2-1 Packing list
Main unit ······················································································· 1
Accessories
Instruction Manual (Basics) ····························································· 1
Instruction Manual (Advanced) ························································ 1
Instruction Manual (Remote Control) ················································ 1Power cord set (with 3-pin plug, 2 m) ················································ 1
PA−001−3234 CALIBRATION BOX *1 ··············································· 1
PA−001−3233 100 Ω RESISTOR *2 ···················································· 1*1: This is used when performing self-calibration of this instrument. For the operatingprocedure, refer to “1.8.1 Self-Calibration” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
*2: This is used when checking the operation of this instrument in the IMPD−3T measurement mode.
For the operating procedure, refer to “4.2.3 Impedance Measurement (Measurement Mode
IMPD−3T)”.

2-2

ZA 57630

2.1 Checking before Use■ Options / related products○ Test fixtures and test leads
Test fixtures and test leads are not included. Please purchase them separately. The major
test fixtures and test leads that can be used in combination with this instrument are as
follows.
Model
ZM23632324
2325AL

Product name
Test fixture
4-terminal alligator clip
test leads
Kelvin clip test leads

2325AM

Kelvin clip test leads

ZM2392
ZM2391

Kelvin clip test leads
3-terminal alligator clip
test leads
Chip component test leads
Chip test fixture
Chip test fixture

2326A
ZM2394
ZM2394H

Supplementary note
For lead components———

Frequency range
DC to 10 MHz
DC to 100 kHz

Large sized clips(Replaceable clips)
Medium sized clips(Replaceable clips)
Simple type2 signals, 1 shielded

DC to 100 kHz

Tweezers type
For SMD & chip parts
For SMD & chip parts

DC to 1.2 MHz
DC to 2 MHz
DC to 36 MHz

DC to 100 kHz
DC to 20 kHz
DC to 20 kHz

The above table lists the test fixtures and test leads that can be used when this instrument isin the IMPD−3T measurement mode. Any model connected to the DUT by 2 terminals will beaffected by the contact resistance and its variations. Even 4-terminal test fixtures and test
leads will similarly be affected by contact resistance and its variations because the IMPD−3T
measurement mode of this instrument is for a 3-terminal connection. For measurements ofapproximately 50 Ω or less, we recommend evaluating the measurement value variations due
to contact resistance using an actual DUT before use.
○ Other options
PA−001−0370

SHUNT RESISTOR

Current-voltage conversion coefficient 1 V/A, rating 1 Arms
For details, refer to the instruction manual.
PA−001−3270

RACK MOUNT KIT (EIA)

This kit is for mounting in an EIA standard rack.
PA−001−3271

RACK MOUNT KIT (JIS)This kit is for mounting in a JIS standard rack.

！ WARNING

There are high voltage parts inside this instrument. Never remove the cover.
No one except trained service technicians who have knowledge of hazard prevention is
authorized to check the inside of this device.

2-3

ZA 57630

2.2 Assembly and Installation

2.2 Assembly and Installation
2.2.1 General Precautions for Installation！ CAUTION

Observe the following points. Otherwise, this instrument may be damaged.
・This instrument uses forced air cooling by fan. If you notice that the fan is stopped, turn off thepower immediately and then contact NF Corporation or its authorized agent.
If you continue to use this instrument with the fan stopped, there is a risk of the expansion ofdamages and hence difficulty/impossibility of repair.
・ Air inlets and outlets are located on the sides, bottom, and rear of this instrument. Do notblock the sides, rear, and bottom.
・Do not install this instrument on its back or side (upright). There is a risk of it falling over. Install
it so that all of the four feet on the bottom sit on the flat surface of a table, etc.

2.2.2 Installation Conditions● Install this instrument in a place that satisfies the following temperature and humidity
conditions.
Operation: +0 to +40 °C, 5 to 85 % RH (absolute humidity 1 to 25 g/m3, non-condensing)
Storage: -10 to +50 °C, 5 to 95 % RH (absolute humidity 1 to 29 g/m3,
non-condensing)● Place this instrument in a location of altitude up to 2,000 m.
● Do not install the instrument in the following locations:・ Where there is flammable gas
There is a risk of explosion. Never install or use it in such a location.
・ Outdoors, where exposed to direct sunlight, or near fire or a heat source
The performance may not be satisfied, or a failure may occur.
・ Where there are corrosive gases and vapors, a lot of dust and particles, salty air
and oily smoke, and metal powder, etc.
・ Where there is a lot of vibration
Malfunction or a failure may occur.
・ Near an electromagnetic field source, high-voltage equipment, power line, or
pulse noise source
Malfunction or a failure may occur.
● This instrument may cause interference if used in residential areas. Use in such locations
must be avoided unless the user takes special measures to reduce electromagnetic
emissions to prevent interference to the reception of radio and television broadcasts.

2-4

ZA 57630

2.2 Assembly and Installation

2.2.3 Rack Mounting
This instrument can be mounted in a 19-inch IEC rack, EIA standard rack, or JIS standard
rack by attaching a rack mount kit (sold separately). Rack mount kits for a milli rack (JIS)and inch rack (EIA) are available.
First attach the rack mount kit as shown in “Figure 2-1 Rack Mount Assembly Drawing(JIS)” or “Figure 2-2 Rack Mount Assembly Drawing (EIA)”, and then mount this instrument
to a rack.

！ WARNING

When mounting this instrument in a rack, be sure to install rack rails, etc. to support this
instrument. Failure to do so, may result in injury or instrument damage due to falling.

！ CAUTION

・ Provide the rack with ventilation holes or a cooling fan for cooling.
・ This instrument has air inlets on both sides and the bottom.
Provide clearance of at least 20 mm from the sides of this instrument and the inner walls of
the rack, etc.
・ There is an air outlet on the rear panel.
Provide clearance of at least 50 mm from the rear of this instrument and the inner wall of therack, etc.
If the ambient temperature exceeds the specified limit or the air inlets and outlets areblocked, the performance may not be able to be maintained or this instrument may bedamaged.

2-5

ZA 57630

2.2 Assembly and Installation

Figure 2-1

Rack Mount Kit Assembly Drawing (JIS)2-6

ZA 57630

2.2 Assembly and Installation

Figure 2-2

Rack Mount Kit Assembly Drawing (EIA)
2-7

ZA 57630

2.2 Assembly and Installation

Figure 2-3

Rack Mount Dimensions (JIS)2-8

ZA 57630

2.2 Assembly and Installation

Figure 2-4

Rack Mount Dimensions (EIA)

2-9

ZA 57630

2.3 Grounding and Power Supply Connection

2.3 Grounding and Power Supply Connection■ Be sure to perform grounding.

！ WARNING

This instrument uses a line filter, which may cause electric shock if the product is not grounded.
To prevent electrical shock accidents, be sure to connect it to an earth ground so that groundresistance is 100 Ω or less.
This instrument will be automatically grounded if the 3-pin power plug is connected to a
power outlet with a protective ground contact.
■ The power supply conditions of instrument are as follows.
Voltage range:

100 V to 230 VAC ±10 %, however 250 V or lessFrequency:

50 Hz / 60 Hz ±2 Hz

Power consumption:

Max. 100 VA

Overvoltage category:

II■ Perform the following procedure to connect to the power supply.
1) Check that the voltage of the commercial power supply to be connected is within thevoltage range of this instrument.
2) Turn off the power switch of this instrument. The power switch is located on the rear
panel.
3) Connect the power cord to the power inlet on the rear panel of this instrument.
4) Insert the plug of the power cord into a power outlet with a protective ground contact.
5) Turn on the power switch on the rear panel. Leave the power switch on during normal
operation.
！ CAUTION

The power cord set that comes with this instrument is intended for use only with this instrument.
The power cord set should not be used with any other product or for any other purpose.
When connecting this instrument to the mains, be sure to use only the power cord that isprovided with this instrument.
If the power outlet voltage is greater than 125 V AC or you want to use the product in aforeign country, consult with NF Corporation or its authorized agent.
When turning the power off and then back on, wait at least 1 minute before turning thepower back on.
■ In an emergency, the power cord can be used to disconnect this instrument from the mains.

2-10

ZA 57630

2.3 Grounding and Power Supply Connection！ WARNING

To ensure that the power cord can be disconnected from the inlet of this instrument, provide
sufficient space around the inlet, and to ensure that the power plug can be disconnected fromthe outlet, use an outlet in an easily accessible location and provide sufficient space around theoutlet.

2-11

ZA 57630

2.4 Simple Operation Check

2.4 Simple Operation Check
It is recommended to check the operation of this instrument with the following procedure
after purchase or when this instrument has not been used for an extended period of time.
Prepare the CALIBRATION BOX that was included with this instrument.
For the descriptions and operating procedures of keys, screens, and other parts, refer to “3.1Functions and Operations of Panel Parts” and “3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens”.
1. Connect to the power supply and then press the standby switch on the front panel.
Wait until the system check ends normally.
For details on the display when the power is turned on, refer to “4.1 Display and Operation
when Power Is Turned On”.
2. Reset to the factory default settings.
Tap [MENU], select [Other] – [SYSTEM], and tap the [INITIALIZE] function key. A
confirmation message appears. Tap [OK].
3. Attach the included CALIBRATION BOX to the HCUR to LCUR connectors on the front panel.
ZA57630

LCUR

HCUR

CALIBRATION BOX(accessory)
4. Execute self-calibration.
Tap [Calibration] in top menu 2/3. Select [Calibration] – [CALIBRATION] and then tap the[EXEC] function key. A CALIBRATION BOX connection confirmation message appears.
Tap [OK] and then wait for self-calibration to finish.
For details on self-calibration, refer to “1.8.1 Self-Calibration” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
5. Turn on measurement signal output.
Press the ON AC/DC key on the front panel to turn on measurement signal output.
Both the AC lamp and DC lamp on the right of the ON AC/DC key light.
6. Perform sweep measurement and check that measurement can be performed correctly.
Press the MEASURE START UP key on the front panel to perform up-sweep measurement
When measurement finishes, the impedance and phase are displayed in a graph. The
measurement results are normal if they are 1.0 Ω ±0.1 Ω or less and 0° ±3.0° or less.
The simple operation check is now complete.

！ WARNING

If you notice smoke or a strange odor or sound being emitted from this instrument
Promptly disconnect the power cord from the outlet and put a notice on the product stating that it
cannot be used until repairs are completed.

2-12

ZA 57630

2.5 Calibration

2.5 Calibration
This instrument performance test described in “4.5 Performance Test” in Instruction Manual(Advanced) should be performed. Although the testing interval depends on how often this instrument isused and the conditions under which it is used, the test should be performed at least once a year.
Furthermore, it is recommended to carry out the performance test before using this
instrument for important measurements and tests.
The performance test should be carried out by a person who is familiar with measuring
instrument specifications and who has general knowledge regarding measuring instruments.
If the performance test results do not satisfy the specifications, NF Corporation will perform
adjustment or calibration to restore the original performance. If calibration or adjustment isrequired, contact NF Corporation or its authorized agent. Charges apply for calibration andadjustment services.

2-13

ZA 57630

(Blank)

2-14

ZA 57630

3. Panel Operations

3.1

Functions and Operations of Panel Parts ............................ 3-2

3.2

Input and Output Connectors .............................................. 3-8

3.3

Overview of the Operation Screens .................................. 3-19

3.4

Operation Tree .................................................................. 3-32

3.5

Setting Screen Reference ................................................. 3-42

3.6

Initial Settings ...................................................................3-111

3-1

ZA 57630

3.1 Functions and Operations of Panel Parts

3.1 Functions and Operations of Panel Parts
This section provides an overview of the part names, functions, and operations of the front
and rear panels.

3.1.1 Front PanelLCD (touch panel input)

Measurement
controls

Displays the setting menus andmeasurement results.
You can configure the settings bytouching the screen.

Standby switch

Markeroperation keys

Menu operation keys

Measurement
signal controls
Knob

ENTRY

section

Metal terminal grounded
to the enclosure

SCREEN COPY key

Figure 3-1

3-2

Measurement
connectors
Measurement
modes:
IMPD–EXTIMPD–3T
G–PH

Measurement
connector
Measurement
mode:
IMPD–2T

Front Panel

ZA 57630

3.1 Functions and Operations of Panel Parts

3.1.2 Rear Panel
Power inlet
The center pin is for theprotective ground terminal.
Be sure to perform grounding.
POWER switch

Nomenclaturelabel

GPIB connector
LAN connector

RS-232 connector

Certification
label

Handler interface connector

VGA connector

10MHz REF IN
connector
AUX connector

Figure 3-2

3-3

USB connector

Air
exhaustvent

DC BIAS OUT
connector
10MHz REF OUT connector

Rear Panel

ZA 57630

3.1 Functions and Operations of Panel Parts

3.1.3 Descriptions of the Screens and Keys
This instrument can be operated with the front panel keys and LCD touch panel. Most
operations can be performed using either of them. The input devices are always available sothey can be used together to perform operations. For example, when entering numericalvalues, you can use the LCD touch panel to enter the first digits of the number and thencomplete the entry by using the keys on the front panel.
This instrument uses a graphical user interface (GUI). Settings and operations can be
performed by opening menus and tapping the desired functions. Functions can also be
invoked by tapping on the LCD screen button controls.
Key Title
Indicates a key with this name or symbol printed on the key top. Keys that do not haveprinted labels are identified by the names that appear above them on the panel.
A cursor key indicates the direction by its shape and the title is not printed on it.
Key Title / Secondary Function Name
Indicates a key that has the main function printed on the key top and a secondary function
printed near it. When the secondary function is executed in this instruction manual, anotation with "/ secondary function name" added to the key is used. When the main function
is executed, "/ secondary function name" is not added.
Lamp Title
Indicates the name of the nearest key or a lamp that displays a title when it is lit.
[[Dialog Title]]
Indicates a GUI dialog box (window) that is displayed on the LCD screen.
[Button Title]
Indicates a GUI button that is displayed on the LCD screen. Input is performed by tapping
the button on the screen. GUI buttons also include menus and function keys.

3-4

ZA 57630

3.1 Functions and Operations of Panel Parts

3.1.4 Explanation of Front Panel Keys
● Menu operation keys and knob

・MENU

: This displays the top menu on the LCD. Pressing this key displays or
hides the menu. For details, refer to “■ Menu” in “3.3.1 Menu Operating
Procedures”. This has the same function as the [MENU] button displayed
at the upper right of the LCD.

・SETUP: This displays a shortcut menu for quickly accessing items for which
settings are frequently changed. This has the same function as the[SETUP] button displayed at the upper right of the LCD.

・Up/down/left/right keys:
The left and right keys are used to move the menu page and to move thecursor between numerical values or between characters in a text string
during editing.
The up and down keys are used to move the focus, move between menus,
and increase or decrease numerical values or text values during editing.
・CANCEL / ESC: This cancels the editing operation (changing of a setting) and returns thesetting to the value before editing.
・ENTER: When this is pressed, the item with the focus on it switches to the editing
state. When it is pressed during editing, the editing result is applied.

・Knob: This is used to move a marker when markers are displayed inmeasurement graphs in addition to moving the focus and increasing or
decreasing numerical values or text values during editing.

● Marker operation keys
Markers are used for reading the values of data traces displayed on a graph.
Up to eight markers (MARKER1 to MARKER8) can be used, and one of them is a marker that canbe moved by knob operation (active marker) and whose read values are displayed on the graph.
Each of the markers can be placed on any of the measurement data trace (MEAS) and eightreference data traces (REF1 to REF8). These markers can be set in [Marker] – [ACTIVE].
The active marker and the data trace indicated by the active marker can be switched withthe following keys. A marker or data trace that is not displayed cannot be selected.

3-5

ZA 57630

3.1 Functions and Operations of Panel Parts
・TRACE: This switches the data trace indicated by the active marker.
Each press of the button switches the data trace indicated by the active
marker in the order of MEAS → REF1 → ... → REF8 → MEAS.

・ACTIVE:: This switches the active marker.
Each press of the button switches the marker that is active in the order of
MARKER1 → MARKER2 → ... → MARKER8 → MARKER1. However, ahidden marker cannot be made active.

A marker or data trace that is not displayed cannot be selected.
● SCREEN COPY key

・SCREEN COPY: This outputs an image of the current LCD screen.
A file in MS-Windows bitmap format (.bmp) is saved to a USB memory
device.
● Measurement controls

・STOP: This stops sweep or spot measurement.

・DOWN UP: These buttons starts sweep measurement. DOWN performs the sweep inthe direction of upper limit → lower limit, and UP in the direction oflower limit → upper limit.

・SPOT: This button starts spot measurement. Measurement is performed based

・REPEATon the current settings.
: Pressing this button toggles the REPEAT lamp above the key on and off.
If measurement (sweep or spot) is started while the REPEAT lamp is on,
measurement is repeated. Spot measurements are repeated with thesame settings and sweep measurements are repeated by starting thesweep again after the sweep ends. Pressing the STOP key ends themeasurements.
If spot measurement is started while the REPEAT lamp is off,measurement is performed one time. If sweep measurement is started,
the sweep is made one time and then measurement ends.

3-6

ZA 57630

3.1 Functions and Operations of Panel Parts● Measurement signal controls

・AC/DC OFF: This turns the outputs off. The AC lamp and DC lamp both go out.

・AC OFF: This turns only the AC output off. Only the AC lamp goes out.

・AC/DC ON: This turns the outputs on. The AC lamp and DC lamp both light.

Even if the settings are 0 Vrms and 0 V respectively, the AC lamp and DC lamp light in the
output on state.
When the power is turned on, this instrument starts up with both the AC and DC outputs inthe off state. Also, the outputs turn off if the settings are reset (RESET) or this instrument isrestored to the factory default state (INITIALIZE) (refer to “3.5.14 Other Menu”). The on/off
state is not changed by loading measurement conditions (refer to “3.5.9 Storage Menu”).
● ENTRY (Keypad)This is a set of keys for entering the numeric values of setting parameters.
・0 to 9 ． - : These enter numeric values.
・EXP: This is used to enter numeric values in exponential format.

・BS: This is the backspace key.
Pressing this key during numeric input deletes the number that is to theleft of the cursor. After deletion, the number string that is to the left of・＜ ＞

the cursor shifts one character to the right.
: These keys move the cursor position to the left or right.

・CANCEL: This key discards the numerical value being input and returns the value
to previous one.

・ENTER: This key applies the setting after a numerical value has been entered.
The previous setting is kept until this key is pressed.

● LCD touch panel
The LCD of this instrument is equipped with a touch panel. You can select and set
instrument functions and measurement parameters by touching the screen with a fingertip.
The touch panel uses a resistive film, so you can use a non-conductive stylus pen or a gloved
fingertip to operate it.
The surface of the touch panel is easily scratched, so do not use hard or sharp objects tooperate it.

3-7

ZA 57630

3.2 Input and Output Connectors

3.2 Input and Output Connectors
The connector to use for measurement differs as follows depending on the measurementmode setting.
Measurement mode

Connector to use

IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T, G−PH : LCUR/PORT2, HPOT/PORT1, HCUR/OSC
IMPD−2T: PORT3

For the LCUR/PORT2, HPOT/PORT1, and HCUR/OSC measurement connectors, thespecifications differ depending on the measurement mode. The LPOT measurement connector
is not connected (unconnected connector).

3.2.1 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Modes IMPD−EXT and G−PH)■ Explanation of each connector(Measurement mode: IMPD−EXT)
OSC

Outputs a signal to drive the DUT.

PORT1

Measures the voltage signal applied to the DUT.

PORT2

Measures the signal resulting from converting the current flowing to the
DUT to voltage.

(Measurement mode: G−PH)
OSC

Outputs a signal to drive the EUT.

PORT1

Measures the output signal of the EUT.

PORT2Measures the input signal of the EUT.
DC BIAS

～
1 MΩ

PORT2

1 MΩ

LPOT

PORT1

50 Ω

OSC

Figure 3-3 Functions of Measurement Connectors (Measurement Modes IMPD−EXT and
G−PH)■ Specifications of each connector
The major specifications of the measurement connectors are as follows. The specifications arecommon in the IMPD−EXT and G−PH measurement modes.
PORT1, PORT2
Connector: BNC connector

Input voltage: Max. 7 Vrms (±11 V)

Input Impedance: 1 MΩ ±2 %, 25 pF ±5 pF (PORT1) in parallel
1 MΩ ±2 %, 30 pF ±5 pF (PORT2) in parallel
3-8

ZA 57630

3.2 Input and Output Connectors
OSC
Connector: BNC connector

Output amplitude: Max. 3 Vrms

DC bias: Max. ±5 V

(However, it is restricted to a maximum of ±5 V along with the measurement signal
amplitude.)Output impedance : 50 Ω (nominal value)■ Measurement connectors when power is off
The measurement connectors are connected to the internal circuits even when the power is off.
！ CAUTION

・ Do not apply a large external signal to the measurement connectors. Even when the power isoff, do not apply an external signal. There is a risk of damage to this instrument.
・ Do not connect a charged capacitor. If there is a possibility that the DUT may be charged,
discharge the DUT sufficiently before connecting it. If the DUT is discharged to themeasurement connectors, this instrument may be damaged.

3.2.2 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode: IMPD−3T)■ Explanation of each connector
HCUR

Outputs a signal to drive the DUT.

HPOT

Measures the voltage signal applied to the DUT.

LCUR

Measures the current flowing to the DUT.
DC BIAS～50 Ω 1 kΩ
A

V

LCUR

LPOT

HPOT

HV DC BIAS

HCUR

Figure 3-4 Functions of Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode: IMPD−3T)■ Measurement signals
The major specifications of the measurement signals are as follows.
Connector: BNC connector

Signal amplitude: Max. 3 Vrms

DC bias: When using normal DC bias

3-9

±5 V

ZA 57630

3.2 Input and Output Connectors
When using HV DC bias

±40 V

Maximum driving current:

60 mArms (depends on the measurement range, frequency etc.)

Output impedance :50 Ω(When HV DC bias is used, approximately 1 kΩ at approximately
100 Hz or less.)■ Measurement connectors when power is off
The measurement connectors are connected to the internal circuits even when the power is off.
！ CAUTION

・ Do not apply a large external signal to the measurement connectors. Even when the power isoff, do not apply an external signal. There is a risk of damage to this instrument.
・ Do not connect a charged capacitor. If there is a possibility that the DUT may be charged,
discharge the DUT sufficiently before connecting it. If the DUT is discharged to themeasurement connectors, this instrument may be damaged.

3.2.3 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode: IMPD−2T)■ Explanation of connector
PORT3This is connected to the DUT.

DC BIAS～50 Ω 1 kΩ
HV DC BIAS
A
V

PORT3
Figure 3-5 Functions of Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode: IMPD−2T)■ Measurement signals
The major specifications of the measurement signals are as follows.
Connector: N connector

Signal amplitude: Max. 3 Vrms

DC bias: When using normal DC bias
When using HV DC bias

3-10

±5 V

±40 V

ZA 57630

3.2 Input and Output Connectors
Maximum driving current :60 mArms (depends on the measurement range,
frequency etc.)

Output impedance : 50 Ω(When HV DC bias is used, approximately 1 kΩ at approximately
100 Hz or less.)■ Measurement connectors when power is off
The measurement connectors are connected to the internal circuits even when the power is off.
！ CAUTION

・ Do not apply a large external signal to the measurement connectors. Even when the power isoff, do not apply an external signal. There is a risk of damage to this instrument.
・ Do not connect a charged capacitor. If there is a possibility that the DUT may be charged,
discharge the DUT sufficiently before connecting it. If the DUT is discharged to themeasurement connectors, this instrument may be damaged.

3.2.4 DC BIAS OUTThis is an output connector for supplying DC bias to the DUT/EUT.
■ Signal specifications
Maximum output voltage : ±10 V
Output impedance : 600 Ω (nominal value)
Connector: Rear panel, BNC connector

Output Amp
Relay 600 Ω

DC BIAS OUT

Figure 3-6 Function of DC BIAS OUT Connector
When the connector to output DC bias is set to the DC BIAS OUT connector on the rear panel,
DC bias (DC voltage) is output from this connector. Only the AC component will be output by
the OSC connector on the front panel at that time.
For details on how to set the DC bias, refer to “4.3 Setting Measurement Signals”.
The output impedance is 600 Ω whether output is on or off. The relay is always connected tothe internal output amplifier (the relay is always maintained in the on state) even when theDC bias is set to OFF. Therefore, the output impedance is not changed by performing theoutput on/off operation.

3-11

ZA 57630

3.2 Input and Output Connectors
Output voltage setting is a voltage at no load (open load). When a 600 Ω load is connected, avoltage that is half of the set value is output.
■ Connectors when power is off
When the power is off, the relay is also off and the output amplifier is separated from the DC
BIAS OUT connector on the rear panel. The output impedance is 600 Ω even in this state.
However, when the power is turned on or off, the output impedance will become temporarily
unstable.
！ CAUTION

Applying an external signal to the DC BIAS OUT connector will damage the internal circuits.
Never apply a signal.

3.2.5 10 MHz REF IN
If a clock signal is input to this connector, it replaces the internal reference clock of this
instrument and this instrument will operate using the external clock. The accuracy of themeasurement frequency is determined by the accuracy of the clock frequency that is input.
Furthermore, frequency-synchronized measurement across multiple instruments is possible
by using a common reference clock.
■ Signal specifications
Input voltage: 0.5 Vp-p to 5 Vp-p

Input waveform: Sinusoidal or square

Input impedance: 300 Ω (nominal value), AC coupling

Maximum non-destructive input voltage : 10 Vp-p
: Isolated from the enclosure, max. 42 Vpk (DC + ACpk)

Connector: Rear panel, BNC connector±42 V

470 kΩ

1 MΩ

10 MHzREF IN(300 Ω)Signal grounding

EXT REF
CKT

Figure 3-7 Function of 10 MHz REF IN Connector！ WARNING

Do not apply a voltage exceeding the rated isolation voltage. Doing so may result in insulation
breakdown and risk of electrical shock or damage to this instrument.

3-12

ZA 57630

3.2 Input and Output Connectors

3.2.6 10 MHz REF OUTThis connector outputs the clock signal that is actually used as the reference clock by this
instrument. When this instrument is operating with an external 10 MHz reference clock(input to 10 MHz REF IN), the frequency that is output is the same as that of the externalreference clock.
■ Signal specifications
Output voltage: 1 Vp-p / 50 Ω

Output waveform: SquareOutput impedance : 50 Ω (nominal value), AC coupling: Rear panel, BNC connector
50 Ω
CMOS
330 kΩ

Connector

LOGIC

10 MHzREF OUT

Figure 3-8 Function of 10 MHz REF OUT Connector！ CAUTION

・ Applying an external signal to the 10 MHz REF OUT connector will damage the internal
circuits. Never apply a signal.
・ The BNC ground of the 10 MHz REF OUT connector is connected to the enclosure. Do notconnect signals for which there is a difference in potential relative to the enclosure. Doing so
may damage this instrument.

3-13

ZA 57630

3.2 Input and Output Connectors

3.2.7 HANDLER INTERFACE
The comparator results can be output into the handler interface connector on the rear panelof this instrument. Connecting to the part handler allows an auto part sorting system to be
configured.
For details on the comparator, refer to “1.15.1 Comparator” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
26 27･････････････････････････50

Figure 3-9

Pin No.
1
26
2
27
3
28
4
29
5
30
6
31
7
32
8
33
9
34
10
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16 to 20
21 to 25
41 to 45
46 to 50

I/O
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
--IN
IN
OUT
OUT

1 2････････････････････････････25
Handler Interface Connector Pin Assignment Diagram
Table 3-1 Handler Interface Signal Layout
Signal name
When LIMIT
When ZONE
When BIN sorting
comparison
comparison
TRIG, /TRIG
/RCL0
/RCL1
/RCL2
/RCL3
/RCL4
/RCL5
/RCL6
/RCL-VALID
/BIN1
/P-HI
/Y1-OUT/BIN2/P-IN/Y1-IN/BIN3/P-LO/Y1-NA/BIN4/S-HI/Y2-OUT/BIN5/S-IN/Y2-IN/BIN6/S-LO/Y2-NA
/BIN7
/IN
/BIN8
(Not used, fixed to H)(Not used, fixed
/BIN9
/NA
to H)
/BIN10(Not used, fixed to H)/BIN11(Not used, fixed to H)/BIN12(Not used, fixed to H)/BIN13(Not used, fixed to H)/BIN14(Not used, fixed to H)/OUT_OF_BINS/OUT/INDEX/EOM/ERR(reserved)(reserved)(N.C)
EXT_DCV
EXT_COM
INT_DCV
INT_COM

3-14

ZA 57630

3.2 Input and Output Connectors

Pin No.

I/O

1

IN
26

2
27
3
28
4
29
5

IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN

30
6

OUT
OUT

31
7

OUT
OUT

32
8

OUT
OUT

33
9

OUT
OUT

34
10

OUT
OUT

35
11

OUT
OUT

36
12

OUT
OUT

37

13

OUT

OUT
38

14

OUT
OUT

39
15
40
16 to 20

OUT
IN
--IN

Table 3-2 Handler Interface Signal Functions
Signal name
Description
External trigger signal (rising edge).
TRIG, /TRIG
Can be switched to falling edge.
/RCL0 (LSB)
Setting/correction memory selection signal(binary)/RCL1
If the trigger signal of pin no.1 is received/RCL2
when /RCL-VALID is the low level and trigger/RCL3source is the handler, the setting and/RLC4correction data is recalled from the memory/RCL5
specified by these signals and measurement isconducted under those conditions. Recalling of/RCL6 (MSB)a memory number out of the range will resultin an error.
Indicates that the memory selection signal is/RCL-VALID
valid.
○ When BIN sorting/BIN1, /P-HI, /Y1-OUT/BIN1 to /BIN14: BIN sorting result signals/BIN2, /P-IN, /Y1-IN/OUT OF BINS: Fail signal/BIN3, /P-LO, /Y1-NA○ When LIMIT comparison/P-HI，/P-IN，/P-LO/BIN4, /S-HI, /Y2-OUT: Primary parameter comparison result signal/BIN5, /S-IN, /Y2-IN/S-HI，/S-IN，/S-LO/BIN6, /S-LO, /Y2-NA: Secondary parameter comparison result
signal/BIN7, /IN, /IN/IN: Signal for when both the primary and/BIN8, (NU), (NU)
secondary parameters pass
/OUT: Signal for when at least one of the/BIN9, (NU), /NA
primary and secondary parameters/BIN10, (NU), (NU)
fails.
/BIN11, (NU), (NU)
○ When ZONE comparison/Y1-OUT, /Y1-IN: Y1 comparison result/BIN12, (NU), (NU)
signals/BIN13, (NU), (NU)
/Y2-OUT, /Y2-IN: Y2 comparison result
signals/BIN14, (NU), (NU)
/Y1-NA, /Y2-NA, /NA: Comparison notpossible signals/IN: Signal for when both the Y1 and Y2/OUT_OF_BINS, /OUT,
parameters pass
/OUT
/OUT: Signal for when at least one of the Y1
and Y2 parameters fails.
Signal acquisition end signal. When it/INDEX
becomes the low level, it is possible to switch
to next DUT.
End of measurement signal. When it becomes/EOM
the low level, the comparison result becomesvalid and reading becomes possible.
Measurement error signal. It indicates an/ERR
excessive voltage or current, ALC failure, orother error.
(reserved)
Not used. Do not connect anything.
(reserved)
Not used. Do not connect anything.
N.C
Not used. Do not connect anything.
EXT_DCV
External DC power input (+5 V to +24 V)

3-15

ZA 57630

3.2 Input and Output Connectors

21 to 25

IN

EXT_COM

41 to 45OUT

INT_DCV

46 to 50OUT

INT_COM

External DC power input (common)
Each signal of the handler interface isisolated from the enclosure and operates withexternal DC power.
Internal DC power output (+5 V)
Internal DC power output (common)
This is connected to the enclosure. To operate
the handler interface by the internal DC
power source, connect between EXT COM andINT COM and between EXT DCV and INT
DCV.

* (NU): Not used, unused signal. H level is always output.
* When /ERR output, other comparison result signals will not be output.
* The “/” at the beginning of the signal name indicates negative logic (1 at low level).
■ Signal specifications
External DC power: Rated voltage +5 to +24 V, operating range +4.5 to +26.4 V
Maximum current consumption 45 mA (5 V) / 100 mA (12 V) /180 mA (24 V)

Internal DC power: +5 V typ., 70 mA max., connected to the enclosure
Also output during standby.

Isolation: 42 Vpk(each signal, common) vs. enclosure

When the internal DC power output connector and the external
DC power input are connected, isolation is not provided.
Output Characteristics
Output low level: 0.5 V max. (power voltage 5 V, sink current 6 mA)
1.2 V max. (power voltage 12 V, sink current 8 mA)
2.4 V max. (power voltage 24 V, sink current 10 mA)

Output high level : 5 to 24 V (depends on the power voltage)
Input characteristics (excluding trigger)
Input low level: (Power voltage – 4.1 V) max.

Input high level: (Power voltage – 1.1 V) min.

Input characteristics (trigger)
Input low level: (Power voltage × 0.3 V) max.

Input high level: (Power voltage × 0.7 V) min.

Connector: DDK 57 series 50-pin or equivalent！ WARNING

Do not apply a voltage more than 42 Vpk between the signals or common of the handler
interface and the enclosure. There is a risk of an electric shock.

3-16

ZA 57630

3.2 Input and Output Connectors！ CAUTION

Do not apply a voltage more than 42 Vpk between the signals or common of the handler
interface and the enclosure. There is a risk of damage to this instrument.
■ Handler interface I/O equivalent circuit
5 kΩ

EXT_DCV

EXT_DCV

3.3 kΩ

12 kΩ

5 kΩ

(OUT)
EXT_COM(a) Output

EXT_DCV(IN)

TRIG, /TRIG

EXT_COM

EXT_COM(b) Input other than trigger(c) Trigger input
Figure 3-10 Equivalent Circuit of Handler Interface■ Cable length of handler interface
A cable length of 5 m or less is recommended. The maximum length is 15 m. Use a shielded cable.

3.2.8 AUX
This includes signals to indicate the measurement signal output on/off state of this
instrument and the 4-bit logic output and 3-bit logic input, and can be used for external
device control. When a sequence sweep is performed, a 4-bit logic pattern that differs in eachsequence can be output. The logic input pin state can be read using a remote interface.
7
1

Figure 3-11

14
8
AUX Connector Pin Assignment Diagram

Table 3-3 AUX Connector Signal Layout
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

I/O
(Reserved)(Reserved)
GND
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
GND
GND
(Reserved)
IN
OUT
OUT
IN

Function(+24 V)
PIN0
D2
D0(LSB)/ON(−24 V)PIN1
D3(MSB)
D1
PIN2

3-17

ZA 57630

3.2 Input and Output Connectors！ CAUTION+24 V is output from pin 2 and -24 V is output from pin 10, but do not connect a device otherthan one specified by NF Corporation. If other than a specified device is connected, there is arisk that this product may become unstable.
■ Signal specifications
Connector: DDK 57 series 14-pin or equivalent

Input signal level: TTL level 0 to 5 V (low 0.8 V or less, high 2.6 V or more)

Output signal level: TTL level 0 to 5 V (nominal value)■ I/O equivalent circuit
+5 V

+5 V

10 kΩ

220 Ω
(OUT)

Figure 3-12

+5 V

10 kΩ

(IN)

I/O Connector Equivalent Circuit of AUX Connector■ Connectors when power is off
The connectors are connected to the internal circuits even when the power is off.

3.2.9 VGA
Outputs the same image signal as that of the LCD of instrument to an external monitor or
projector.
■ Signal specifications
Connector: Mini D-sub 15-pin (female), analog RGB component video signal

Signal: 800 × 600 dot (SVGA)
Horizontal scanning frequency = 37.9 kHz, vertical scanningfrequency = 60.3 Hz

3-18

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens

3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens3.3.1 Menu Operating Procedures
Most of the settings of this instrument can be configured by tap operation of the menus anddialog boxes (windows). This section describes the basic operations of the menus.
The following figure shows an example of a screen without menus displayed.
Statusdisplay area

Measurement
condition display area
area

Basic menu
operation area

Markeroperationarea

Markerdisplayarea

Graph display
area

Figure 3-13

Screen Immediately after Startup■ Status display area
This area displays the remote control status, measurement status, and other statuses of this
instrument.
Measurement
mode

Date
and
time

Reference clock
selection status

LOCAL
buttonMeasurement
statusRemote control
statusFigure 3-14

Status Display Area

・Measurement modes
IMPD−EXT: Impedance measurement, uses external current-voltage
conversion.

IMPD−3T: Impedance measurement, uses HCUR, HPOT, LPOT, and LCUR.

IMPD−2T: Impedance measurement, uses PORT3 N connector.

G−PH: Gain-phase measurement.

3-19

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens・Measurement status
CAL: Self-calibration in progress

IDLE: Stopped

SPOT: Spot measurement in progress

UP n/m: Up sweep in progress

DOWN n/m: Down sweep in progress

n: Number of current measurement sequence
m: Total number of sequences
In the single mode (when the REPEAT lamp on the front panel is off), this instrument enters
the stopped (idle) state when measurement finishes. In the repeat mode (when the REPEAT
lamp on the front panel is on), the same measurement is repeated even if one round of
measurement finishes. For sweep measurements, the sweep measurement is resumed overthe same sweep frequency range.
・Reference clock selection status(Nothing is displayed) : Operating with the internal reference clock.
REF: Operating with the external reference clock.

REF (flashing): Operating with the internal reference clock (permission touse an external reference clock is set, but an external clock
has not been detected).

・Remote control status(Nothing is displayed) : Local control in progress
RMT: Remote control in progress

LLO: Remote control is in progress (local lock-out state)

・LOCAL button
The [LOCAL] button is displayed during remote control. When this button is tapped, this
instrument enters the local state and operation can be performed from the panel.
However, if this instrument is in the local lock-out state, it will not return to the local
state.
■ Measurement condition display area
This area displays the major current setting states (measurement conditions).

Figure 3-15

Measurement Condition Display Area

・[FREQUENCY]: Measurement signal frequency

・[AC]: AC voltage amplitude (Vrms) or AC current amplitude (Arms)

・[DC]: DC bias voltage (V) or DC bias current (A)When the output is off, 0 V is displayed for the AC voltage and DC bias.
Each display area can also be used as a setting button, as tapping opens the setting change
menu.
3-20

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens■ Basic menu operation area

Figure 3-16
・[SETUP]

Basic Menu Operation Area

: This displays a shortcut menu for quickly accessing items forwhich settings are frequently changed on this instrument. Thishas the same function as the SETUP key on the front panel.

・[MENU]: This displays the top menu on the LCD. This has the samefunction as the MENU key on the front panel.

■ Marker display area
This area displays marker values for reading measurement data.

Figure 3-17

Marker Display Area

For the operating procedures and other details, refer to “3.5.6 Marker Menu” in this
instruction manual and “1.7 Marker Operation” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
■ Marker operation area
This area is used to perform the basic operations of markers for reading measurement data.

Figure 3-18
・[Trace]

Marker Operation Area

: This switches the data trace indicated by the active marker. Eachtap of the button switches the data trace indicated by the active
marker in the order of MEAS → REF1 → REF2 ... → REF8 →MEAS. This has the same function as the TRACE key on thefront panel.

・[Active]: This switches the active marker. Each tap of the button switches
the marker that is active in the order of MARKER1 →MARKER2 → ... → MARKER8 → MARKER1. This has the samefunction as the ACTIVE key on the front panel.

・[Marker]: This displays a list of all markers (MARKER1 to MARKER8).

・[Color]: This opens a menu for changing the color of a trace.

The active marker is one of up to eight markers and is the marker that can be moved by knob
operation and whose values are displayed in the LCD marker display area. For the detailed

3-21

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens
operating procedures and function details, refer to “3.5.6 Marker Menu” in this instruction
manual and “1.7 Marker Operation” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).

3-22

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens■ MenusPressing the MENU key or tapping the [MENU] button displays a menu (refer to “Figure 3-19
Menu Display Example”). The menus have a hierarchical structure and the menu at the very
top layer of the hierarchy is called the top menu.
Menu

Function keys

Figure 3-19

Menu Display Example

Pressing the MENU key or tapping the [MENU] button toggles between displaying and hiding
a menu.
The top menu has three pages and the page number is displayed at the very top of the top
menu (1/3, 2/3, or 3/3). Tapping the [<<] or [>>] button at the bottom of the menu switches
the menu display in the order of 1/3 ⇔2/3 ⇔3/3 ⇔1/3.
MENU[MENU]

Figure 3-20

Clear menu

Switching Menu (Top Menu)

3-23

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens■ Menu Layer Navigation and Selection
A menu with “>” after the menu name has another menu in a layer below. Tapping that
button displays the menu of the layer below.
To return to the menu of the layer above, tap the button at the top of the menu. A menu witha layer above has “<” displayed on the left of the title of the button at the very top of themenu. Pressing the CANCEL key also returns to the menu one layer above.
Return to the menuof the layer above.

Menu for which the parameter isbeing set or menu with focus on it.

Open the menu in thelayer below.

Open the previous pageof the same menu.

Open the next page ofthe same menu.
Figure 3-21

Menu Layer Operation

The menu currently being set is displayed darker. Even if a menu is not being set, it will be
displayed darker if the focus is on it. Pressing the ENTER key performs the same operation as
tapping the menu with the focus on it, and that menu becomes the target for parameter editing.
■ Function keys
The display changes depending on the open menu. Tapping a button executes or inputs thatfunction. The parameter of the selected menu is displayed on the left end of the function keys.

Figure 3-22

Function Keys

A confirmation dialog box may be displayed before execution depending on the function key. A
confirmation dialog box is displayed in the case of a modification (execution) that will resultin significant changes being made, such as when all of the settings will be reset or
self-calibration will be performed.

3-24

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens■ Numerical settings (immediate settings)
When the function keys are displayed, tapping [MODIFY] enables modification of theparameters. Move to the digit you wish to modify with the left/right key or left/right button.
The digit that can be modified is displayed highlighted.
Use the up/down key, up/down button, or knob to increase or decrease the numerical value ofthe selected digit. Pressing the up key or [▲] button or turning the knob clockwise changes
the value in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → ... 9 → 0 → 1 →. Pressing the down key or [▼] button
or turning the knob counterclockwise changes the value in the opposite order.
The result of the change is applied immediately.
The modification operation is not possible if the setting range is exceeded.

[OK]
ENTER

Figure 3-23

[MODIFY]

Numerical Settings (Immediate Settings)

Press ENTER, CANCEL, or [CLOSE] to end the parameter modification state and display thenormal function keys. The last changed values will be applied.
■ Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)
The procedure is the same as for “Numerical settings (immediate settings)” above, but thesesettings are not applied until you press ENTER or tap [OK].
A range check is performed when ENTER is pressed or [OK] is tapped, and if a value isoutside of the setting range, an error message is displayed and the setting is returned to theoriginal one.
Pressing CANCEL discards the numerical value modification operations performed up untilthat point in time and returns the parameter values to the original ones.

3-25

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens■ Numerical settings
When the function keys are displayed, tapping [EDIT] displays the numerical input palette.
Enter a numerical value in the ENTRY section on the front panel or the palette and press
ENTER or tap [OK] to apply the setting.
Clear theparameter.

[EDIT]

Figure 3-24

[OK] / ENTER

Numerical Settings

Use the left and right keys to move the cursor position when editing numerical values. Use
the BS key or [BS] button to delete the digit to the left (higher order digit) of the cursor(backspace operation).
The EXP key (or [EXP] button) displays “E” in the numerical value input area to represent theexponent (power of 10). For example, pressing 1, 2, . , 3, EXP, - , 1, 2, and ENTER results in
12.3×10−12.
Pressing the CANCEL key ([CANCEL] button) discards the entered value and returns thevalue to that before input.
Depending on the item to be set, buttons for metric prefixes are displayed in the numericalinput palette. You can set the exponent portion by tapping an metric prefix button such as[m] or [k] instead of directly entering it with the EXP key.
If you tap the C button at the top right (right side of the numerical value display area) of thenumerical input palette, the value being edited becomes 0 (display is blank). This button isconvenient when you wish to set a new numerical value. If you tap it by mistake, tap the[CANCEL] button to close the numerical input palette. The original value will be retained.
■ List operations (immediate settings)
List operations allow you to set a setting by selecting from multiple items, such asmeasurement mode settings.
When you open the setting target menu, the selection items are displayed in the menu. The
button of the currently selected item has a check mark (✔) displayed. Tapping the button of
the item to which you wish to change the setting moves the check mark (✔) to the tapped
button and applies the setting.
3-26

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation ScreensFigure 3-25

List Operations (Immediate Settings)■ List operations (requiring confirmation)
The procedure is the same as for “■ List operations (immediate settings)” above, but a setting
confirmation dialog box is displayed at the end and the setting is not applied until you
actually press ENTER or tap [OK]. Pressing CANCEL discards the operation until that point
in time and returns the value to the original setting.
■ Palette operations (immediate settings)
List operations allow you to set a setting by selecting from many items, such as graph axis
display items.
When you open the setting target menu, a palette containing the selection items is displayed.
Tapping the item to which you wish to change the setting selects that item and applies that setting.

Figure 3-26

Palette Operations (Immediate Settings)

3-27

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens■ Text settings (immediate settings)
The procedure is the same as for “■ Numerical settings (immediate settings)” above, butalphabet letters and symbols can also be handled in addition to numerical values. When thefunction keys are displayed, tapping [EDIT] displays the text input palette.
Clearparameter

Figure 3-27

Text Settings (Immediate Settings)

The editing mode can be ended with [OK] / ENTER or [CANCEL] / CANCEL. Even if you
cancel editing, the text entered (edited) up until that point in time will be applied.
The characters that can be handled by this instrument are shown below. However, there aresome characters that cannot be entered for some items, such as file names.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789!"#$%&'()-=^~\|@` [ ] { } ; : + * , . < > / ? _ (space)■ Text settings (requiring confirmation)
The procedure is the same as for “■ Text settings (immediate settings)” above, but the input
must be confirmed with [OK] / ENTER. [CANCEL] / CANCEL key input discards the setting
and returns the text to that before editing started.

3-28

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens
If you tap the [SHIFT] button in the text input palette, the character set of the palettechanges.

Uppercasealphabet letter set

Lowercasealphabet letter set

Number andsymbol set 1

Number andsymbol set 2

Figure 3-28

Switching Text Input Palette

3-29

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation Screens■ Execution operations (requiring confirmation)
Tapping the target menu or function key displays an execution confirmation dialog box. The
operation is executed if you tap [OK] and the operation is canceled if you tap [CANCEL] in theconfirmation dialog box. A confirmation dialog box is displayed in the case of a modification(execution) that will result in significant changes being made, such as when all of thesettings will be reset.

Figure 3-29

Execution Operations (Requiring Confirmation)■ Execution operations (immediate execution)
The procedure is the same as for “■ Execution operations (requiring confirmation),” but an
execution confirmation dialog box is not displayed. Tapping the execution target menu orfunction key executes the function immediately.

3.3.2 Overview of Graph Display■ Graph axes
The graphs that display the measurement data of this instrument have three axes: X-axis,
Y1-axis, and Y2-axis. Furthermore, they have two display styles (single and split), which can

Y1-axisX-axis

Y2-axisY2-axisY1-axisbe set in [Graph] menu – [STYLE].

X-axisX-axisSingle Display

Split Display
Figure 3-30

Graph Display Styles

3-30

ZA 57630

3.3 Overview of the Operation ScreensIn the single display style, the vertical axis on the left side is called the Y1-axis and thevertical axis on the right side is called the Y2-axis. In the split display style, the vertical axisof the upper graph is called the Y1-axis, the vertical axis of the lower graph is called theY2-axis, and the X-axis is common for both graphs.
■ Data display types
The measurement data that is displayed on graphs is measurement data (MEAS) and up to
eight reference data (REF1 to REF8). The results of sweep measurement is always MEAS. As
sweep measurement is performed, MEAS is updated successively. REF1 to REF8 can be
updated by copying MEAS.
Each of MEAS and REF1 to REF8 can be set to be displayed or hidden on the graphs.
■ Markers
There are markers for reading the X, Y1, and Y2 values of data traces on graphs. There are
up to eight markers (MARKER1 to MARKER8), and MARKER1 can be used be used as thenormal marker and MARKER2 to MARKER8 can be used as normal markers, ⊿markers, or⊿ TRKG markers. A ⊿marker is a marker to read the information of the X, Y1, and Y2 axis
difference information relative to MARKER1. The display of a ⊿TRKG marker is the sameas that of a ⊿marker, but the marker is moved to keep the X-axis interval constant if
MARKER1 is moved.
One of the eight displayed markers becomes the active marker, and the position of the active
marker can be moved by knob operation and its read values are displayed in the marker
display area above the graph. The active marker can be selected with ACTIVE or [ACTIVE].
A normal marker is displayed as “*,” a ⊿marker is displayed as “⊿,” and a ⊿ TRKG marker
is displayed as “T” on the graph. The marker numbers (1 to 8) are displayed as numericalvalues directly above the markers. The marker displayed enclosed in a frame is the current
active marker.
The data that is reference by the markers can be set to the measurement data (MEAS) andreference data (REF1 to REF8) by using the TRACE key or [TRACE] button.

3-31

ZA 57630

3.4 Operation Tree

3.4 Operation Tree
The following shows the operation tree for operating this instrument from the panel. For
the descriptions of keys and screens, refer to “3.1 Functions and Operations of Panel Parts”.
Front Panel
MENU key: Displays/hides the menu.

SETUP key

: Open a list of frequently set parameters.

[DISPLAY MODE Y]: Set the measurement item.

[SWEEP ITEM]: Set the sweep item.

[SWEEP UPPER]: Set the sweep upper limit.

[SWEEP LOWER]: Set the sweep lower limit.

[SETTING VIEW]: Display a list of setting items.

CANCEL /ESC: Discard the settings.

ENTER key

: Confirm the settings.

Up/down/left/right keys : Move the cursor and change numerical values.
Modify knob

: Select menus, change parameters, move markers, etc.

SCREEN COPY key: Execute an LCD screen copy.

(Marker operation keys)
TRACE key

: Switch the marker target data.

ACTIVE key: Switch the active marker.

(Measurement control keys)
STOP key: Stop measurement.

DOWN key: Start down-sweep measurement.

SPOT key: Start spot measurement.

UP key: Start up-sweep measurement.

REPEAT key: Switch between single measurement and repeat measurement.

REPEAT lamp

: Lit during repeat measurement.

(Measurement signal control keys)
AC/DC OFF key: Turn off both AC and DC.

AC OFF key: Turn off only AC.

AC/DC ON key: Turn on both AC and DC.

AC lamp: Lit when AC output.

DC lamp: Lit when DC output.

3-32

ZA 57630

3.4 Operation Tree

(Keypad)
0

to

−

key

9,

.

key

: Numerical and decimal point keys
: Minus key

EXP key: Exponent key (power of 10)

BS key: Backspace key

< ,

>

key

: Move the cursor.

CANCEL key: Discard the setting.

ENTER key

: Confirm the setting.

Top menu[Mode]: Set the mode.

[OSC]: Set the measurement signal.

[FREQUENCY]: Set the frequency.

[AMPLITUDE UNIT]: Select the measurement signal setting unit
(voltage/current).

[AMPLITUDE]: Set the measurement signal amplitude.

[AMPLITUDE LIMIT]: Set the measurement signal amplitude limit.

[ALC]: Set the automatic level control.

[ALC]: Enable or disable.

[TOLERANCE]: Set the permissible error.

[RETRY TIMES]: Set the maximum number of retries.

[CORRECTION FACTOR] : Set the control sensitivity.
[DC BIAS]: DC bias[DC BIAS]: Set the DC bias.

[HV BIAS]: Set the HV DC bias.

[OUTPUT CONNECTOR] : Set the DC bias output connector.
[POWER AMP GAIN]: Set the DUT drive amplifier gain.

[AUX PORT SET]

: Set the expansion connector port.

[ON/OFF SYNC]: Turn measurement synchronous driving on or off.

[ON/OFF MODE]: Set the ON/OFF mode.

[FREQ CHNG MODE]: Set the phase for when the frequency changes.

[10MHz REF IN]: Set the reference clock input.

[10MHz REF OUT]

: Set the reference clock output.

3-33

ZA 57630

3.4 Operation Tree

[Measure]: Set measurement.

[PRMTR1]: Set measurement item 1.

[PRMTR2]: Set measurement item 2.

[PRMTR3]: Set measurement item 3.

[PRMTR4]: Set measurement item 4.

[PRMTR5]: Set measurement item 5.

[PRMTR6]: Set measurement item 6.

[MEASURE TIME]: Set the measurement time.

[START DELAY]: Set the measurement start delay time.

[MEASURE DELAY]: Set the measurement delay time.

[TRIGGER SOURCE]: Set the trigger source.

[REPEAT]: Set the repeat mode.
: Set sweep.

[Sweep][SEQ SWEEP]: Set sequence measurement.

[SEQ TRIGGER]: Set sequence measurement trigger.

[SWEEP ITEM]: Set the sweep item.

[SWEEP UPPER]: Set the sweep upper limit.

[SWEEP LOWER]: Set the sweep lower limit.

[RESOLUTION]: Set the sweep resolution.

[SLOW SWEEP]: Automatic high density sweep function[FUNCTION]: Enable or disable.

[TYPE]: Select monitoring parameter.

[VARIATION]: Set the automatic high density sweep threshold.

[RESONANT TRACK]: Resonant frequency tracking measurement function[FUNCTION]: Enable or disable.

[UPPER FREQ]: Set the tracking frequency upper limit.

[LOWER FREQ]: Set the tracking frequency lower limit.

[TARGET PHASE]: Set the target phase.

[TOLERANCE]: Set the permissible error.

[POLARITY]: Set the polarity.

[CORRECTION FACTOR] : Set the tracking sensitivity.

3-34

ZA 57630

3.4 Operation Tree

: Set the graph.

[Graph][TITLE SET]

: Set the graph title.

[DISPLAY MODE X]: Set the X-axis item.

[DISPLAY MODE Y]: Set the Y-axis item.

[DISPLAY TRACE]: Select the data to display.

[MEAS]: Set the display of measurement data.

[REF1]: Set the display of reference data 1.

[REF2]: Set the display of reference data 2.

[REF3]: Set the display of reference data 3.

[REF4]: Set the display of reference data 4.

[REF5]: Set the display of reference data 5.

[REF6]: Set the display of reference data 6.

[REF7]: Set the display of reference data 7.

[REF8]: Set the display of reference data 8.

[SCALE]: Graph axis range setting mode

[SCALE RANGE]: Set the graph axis ranges.

[X MAX]: Set the maximum X-axis value.

[X MIN]: Set the minimum X-axis value.

[Y1 MAX]: Set the maximum Y1-axis value.

[Y1 MIN]: Set the minimum Y1-axis value.

[Y2 MAX]: Set the maximum Y2-axis value.

[Y2 MIN]: Set the minimum Y2-axis value.

[STYLE]: Set the graph style.

[GRID]: Set the grid.

[GRID LINE STYLE]: Set the grid line style.

[PHASE RANGE]: Set the phase display range.

[APERTURE]: Set the number of moving average data points.

[PLOT COLOR]: Set the data trace colors.

[MEAS Y1]

: Set the color of Y1 of the measurement data.

[MEAS Y2]

: Set the color of Y2 of the measurement data.

[GRADATION]: Automatically set the reference data colors bychanging the gradation.

[DEFAULT]: Initialize the data trace colors.

[REF1 Y1]

: Set the color of Y1 of reference data 1.

[REF1 Y2]

: Set the color of Y2 of reference data 1.

[REF2 Y1]

: Set the color of Y1 of reference data 2.

:[REF8 Y2]:
: Set the color of Y2 of reference data 8.

3-35

ZA 57630

3.4 Operation Tree

: Set the markers.

[Marker][ACTIVE]: Set the active marker.

[SEARCH]: Search for a marker.

[X]: Execute an X-axis search.

[Y1]: Execute a Y1-axis search.

[Y2]: Execute a Y2-axis search.

[BW]: Execute a special search.

[AUTO SEARCH]: Set to search automatically when a sweep ends.

[SEARCH VALUE]: Set the marker search values.

[X]: Set the X search value.

[Y1]: Set the Y1 search value.

[Y2]: Set the Y2 search value.

[⊿X]: Set the ⊿X search value.

[⊿Y1]: Set the ⊿Y1 search value.

[⊿Y2]: Set the ⊿Y2 search value.

[SAVE]: Save the marker values.

[MARKER1]: Set marker 1.

[MODE]: Set the marker mode.

[TRACE]: Set the target data.

[SEQ]: Set target sequence.

[POSITION]: Set the marker position.

[MARKER2]: Set marker 2.

[MARKER3]: Set marker 3.

[MARKER4]: Set marker 4.

[MARKER5]: Set marker 5.

[MARKER6]: Set marker 6.

[MARKER7]: Set marker 7.

[MARKER8]: Set marker 8.

3-36

ZA 57630

3.4 Operation Tree

: Data trace[Trace]: Measurement data

[MEAS TRACE COPY]: Copy to reference data.

[REF TRACE][EQU CORR MEM]

: Copy to equalizing data.

*1[OPEN CORR MEM][SHORT CORR MEM]
[LOAD CORR MEM]

: Copy to open correction data.

*2*2: Copy to short correction data.
: Copy to load correction data.

*2[SHORT_PEXT CORR MEM]*2 : Copy to port extended end short correction data.
[OPEN_PEXT CORR MEM]*2 : Copy to port extended end open correction data.
[LOAD_PEXT CORR MEM]*2: Copy to port extended end load correction data.

[AUTO STORE]: Set auto store.

[DELETE MEAS]: Delete the measurement data.

[DELETE REF]

: Delete the reference data.

[CONDITION VIEW]: Display the settings at the time of data measurement.

: Set the input section.

[Range][RANGE PORT1]*3: Set the port 1 measurement range.

[RANGE PORT2]*3: Set the port 2 measurement range.

[RANGE]: Set the impedance measurement range.

*4[OVER LEVEL PORT1] : Set the level for port 1 over-level detection.
*3[OVER LEVEL PORT2]*3 : Set the level for port 2 over-level detection.
[OVER ACT BEEP]: Set the operation (beep) for over-level detection.

[OVER ACT MEAS]: Set the operation (stop measurement) for over-level
detection.

[WTG FAC PORT1]*3: Set the port 1 input weighting factor.

[WTG FAC PORT2]*3: Set the port 2 input weighting factor.

[Storage]: Set data storage.

[CONDITION FILE]: Perform measurement condition file operations.

[DATA FILE]: Perform data file operations.

[EJECT]: Eject the USB memory device.

[SCRN COPY FILE NUMBER]: Set the screen copy file numbering.

*1: Displayed only in the G−PH measurement mode.
*2: Displayed only in the IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T, and IMPD−2T measurement modes.
*3: Displayed only in the IMPD−EXT and G−PH measurement modes.
*4: Displayed only in the IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T measurement modes.

3-37

ZA 57630

3.4 Operation Tree

: Set remote control.

[Remote]: Select the interface.

[INTERFACE][USB]: Display the USB related parameters.

[GPIB]: Set GPIB.
: Set the address.

[ADDRESS][RS-232]: Set RS-232.

[BAUD RATE]: Set the baud rate.

[FLOW CONTROL]: Set flow control.

[TERMINATOR]: Set the message terminator.
: Set Ethernet.

[LAN][DHCP]: Select the method to determine the IP address.

[IP ADDRESS]: Set the IP address.

[DEFAULT GATEWAY]: Set the default gateway.

[SUBNET MASK]: Set the subnet mask.

[DNS]: Set the DNS server.
: Set the handler interface.

*1[HANDLER][TRIGGER POLARITY]*1 : Set the trigger polarity.
[SWEEP DIRECTION]*1[TEST SCREEN]*1: Set sweep direction.
: Display the handler test screen.

*1: Displayed only in the IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T, and IMPD−2T measurement modes.

3-38

ZA 57630

3.4 Operation Tree

: Error correction[Calibration][OPEN CORR][SHORT CORR][LOAD CORR]: Set open correction.

*2: Set short correction.

*2: Set load correction.

*2[FUNCTION]: Enable or disable.

*2: Set the load standard value format.

*2[LOAD STD FMT]

: Set the load standard values.

*2[LOAD STD VALUE][PORT EXT]: Set the port extension.

*2[FUNCTION][Z0]: Enable or disable.

*2: Set characteristic impedance.

*2[ELEC LENGTH]: Set the electrical length.

*2[OPEN_PEXT CORR][SHORT_PEXT CORR][LOAD_PEXT CORR][FUNCTION]: Set open correction.

*2*2: Enable or disable.

*2[LOAD STD FMT][SLOPE COMP][EQUALIZING]*1[CALIBRATION]: Set the load standard value format.

*2[LOAD STD VALUE]*2: Set short correction.
: Set load correction.

*2: Set the load standard values.

*2: Set the slope compensation function.
: Set equalizing.
: Execute self-calibration.

*1: Displayed only in the G−PH measurement mode.
*2: Displayed only in the IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T, and IMPD−2T measurement modes.

3-39

ZA 57630

3.4 Operation Tree

: Various calculation functions[Calculate][EQUIV CKT FITTING]*1 : Estimate the equivalent circuit.
: Select the equivalent circuit.

[CKT TYPE]*1[(prmtr1)]*1: Element value 1[(prmtr2)]*1: Element value 2[(prmtr3)]*1: Element value 3[(prmtr4)]*1: Element value 4*1: Execute curve fit.

[FIT]
[PZT]

: Piezoelectric element characteristics*1[PZT PRMTR]: Calculate the piezoelectric equivalent circuit.

*1: Set the C0 element value.

*1

[C0]

*1

: Set the L element value.

*1: Set the C element value.

[L]

[C]

: Set the R element value.

*1

[R]

[FIT]

: Execute piezoelectric equivalent circuit*1

estimation.
[C0 MODE]: Select the method to determine the C0 value.

*1[FREQ RESOLN][PZT CONST][REL PERMT]: Set the frequency resolution.

*1: Calculate the piezoelectric constant.

*1: Set the relative permittivity.

*1[ELECTRODE AREA]*1: Set the electrode surface area.

[ELECTRODE DISTANCE]*1: Set the distance between electrodes.
: Set the relative permeability.

[REL PERMB]*1[CORE AREA]: Set the core cross-sectional area.

*1[MAG PATH LENGTH][COIL TURNS]*1: Set the core magnetic path length.
: Set the number of coil turns.

*1: Set the winding diameter.

*1[WIRE DIAMETER][ONE TURN LENGTH][WIRE RESISTIVITY]*1*1: Set one coil turn length.
: Set the winding resistivity.

*1: Displayed only in the IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T, and IMPD−2T measurement modes.

3-40

ZA 57630

3.4 Operation Tree

: Set the comparator.

[Comparator]*1[BIN]: Set BIN sorting / LIMIT comparison.

*1[FUNCTION]: Enable or disable.

*1[DEVIATION TYPE]: Set the primary parameter reference value.

*1: Set the secondary parameter reference value.

*1: Set the BIN sorting value.

[SEC REF][ZONE]: Set the deviation mode.

*1[PRI REF][BIN SET]*1: Set ZONE comparison.

*1[FUNCTION]: Enable or disable.

*1[DEVIATION TYPE]*1*1[DEVIATION SET]

: Set the deviation mode.
: Set the reference trace and deviation.

[REF TRACE]: Set the reference trace.

*1: Set the Y1 upper limit.

*1[Y1 LO]: Set the Y1 lower limit.

*1: Set the Y2 upper limit.

*1[Y1 HI][Y2 HI]: Set the Y2 lower limit.

*1[Y2 LO][IMMED SET]
[ACTION]*1[BEEP]: Set the deviation.
: Comparison action*1: Turn the beep on/off.

*1[Other]: Other settings[BEEP]: Turn the beep on/off.

[DATE/TIME]: Set the date and time.

[RESET]: Reset the settings.

[AUX PORT STATUS]: Display the extension port state.

[SYSTEM]: Display this instrument information.

[TOUCH PANEL ADJ]

: Calibrate the touch panel.

[BRIGHTNESS]: Adjust the LCD brightness.

[SETUP]: Open a list of frequently set parameters.

[DISPLAY MODE Y]: Set the measurement item.

[SWEEP ITEM]: Set the sweep item.

[SWEEP UPPER]: Set the sweep upper limit.

[SWEEP LOWER]: Set the sweep lower limit.

[SETTING VIEW]: Display a list of setting items.

*1: Displayed only in the IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T, and IMPD−2T measurement modes.

3-41

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5 Setting Screen ReferenceThis section describes each setting screen.
In the menu explanations that begin from the next page, the procedures for setting andchanging parameters are presented in the formats shown below.
<Numerical settings (immediate settings)><Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)><Numerical settings><List operations (immediate settings)><List operations (requiring confirmation)><Palette operations (immediate settings)><Text settings (immediate settings)><Text settings (requiring confirmation)><Text settings><Execution operations (requiring confirmation)><Execution operations (immediate execution)>
The procedures correspond to the setting procedures in “3.3.1 Menu Operating Procedures,” soplease also refer to that section.

3-42

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.1 Mode Menu

This menu sets the measurement mode of this instrument.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (requiring confirmation)>
・IMPD−EXT : Measure the impedance. Current-voltage conversion needs to be
performed outside of this instrument.
The OSC, PORT1, and PORT2 connectors are used.
・IMPD−3T : Measure the impedance. Measurement is performed using a test fixture
for an LCR meter.
The HCUR, HPOT, LPOT, and LCUR connectors are used.
・IMPD−2T : Measure the impedance. Measure a DUT with a coaxial structure.
The PORT3 connector is used.
・G−PH: Measure the gain and phase.
The OSC, PORT1, and PORT2 connectors are used.

(Supplementary explanation)
When the measurement mode is changed, the frequency, amplitude, and othermeasurement parameters are initialized.

3-43

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.2 OSC Menu

■ [FREQUENCY]: Set the frequency.
This sets the frequency for performing spot measurement.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[SWEEP MIN -> FREQ]*: Copy the sweep lower frequency limit to FREQUENCY.

・[SWEEP MAX -> FREQ]* : Copy the sweep upper frequency limit to FREQUENCY.
・[MKR -> FREQ]*: Copy the frequency of the active marker to FREQUENCY.

・[CURR -> FREQ]: Copy the current measurement signal frequency to
FREQUENCY.

・[EDIT]: Set the frequency with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the frequency setting with the knob or cursor keys.

*: Displayed when frequency sweep.
■ [AMPLITUDE UNIT]:

Set the measurement signal amplitude unit.

This selects the unit (voltage/current) for setting the measurement signal amplitude and DC
bias.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>○ Functions list・[V]: Set with voltage (Vrms, V).
3-44

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference: Set with current (Arms, A).

・[A]■ [AMPLITUDE]： Set the measurement signal amplitude.
This sets the measurement signal amplitude for performing spot measurement.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[SWEEP MIN -> AMPTD]*: Copy the sweep lower amplitude limit to AMPLITUDE.

・[SWEEP MAX -> AMPTD]* : Copy the sweep upper amplitude limit to AMPLITUDE.
・[MKR -> AMPTD]*: Copy the amplitude of the active marker to AMPLITUDE.

・[CURR -> AMPTD]: Copy the current output amplitude to AMPLITUDE.

・[EDIT]: Set the amplitude with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the amplitude setting with the knob or cursor keys.

*: Displayed when measurement signal amplitude sweep.
■ [AMPLITUDE LIMIT]： Set the amplitude limit.
This function is to prevent excessive output due to an incorrect measurement signal
amplitude setting and prevent excessive output when ALC is enabled. An measurement
signal amplitude above that set here will not be output even when ALC is enabled.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[SWEEP MAX -> LIMIT]*: Copy the sweep upper amplitude limit to AMPLITUDE LIMIT.

・[MKR -> LIMIT]*: Copy the amplitude of the active marker to AMPLITUDE LIMIT.

・[EDIT]: Set the amplitude limit with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the amplitude limit with the knob or cursor keys.

*: Displayed when measurement signal amplitude sweep.
■ [ALC]： Set automatic level control.
This is used to automatically adjust the measurement signal output amplitude for supplying a
constant amplitude to the DUT. For details, refer to “1.4.4 ALC” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
■ [ALC]－[ALC]： Enable or disable.
This sets whether or not to perform the ALC operation.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・OFF: Disable the ALC.

*1

: Control the amplitude so that the PORT1 input amplitude becomes constant.

*1

・CV2

: Control the amplitude so that the PORT2 input amplitude becomes constant.

*2: Enable the amplitude compression function (constant voltage or constant current).

・CV1
・ON

*1: Displayed only in the IMPD−EXT and G−PH measurement modes.
3-45

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference*2: Displayed only in the IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T measurement modes.
(Supplementary explanation)
When the measurement mode is IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T, the operation when this is set
to “ON” is in accordance with the “AMPLITUDE UNIT” setting for the amplitude unit
(constant voltage operation with the voltage unit and constant current operation withthe current unit).
■ [ALC]－[TOLERANCE]: Set the permissible error.
This sets the permissible error for the signal amplitude and the measured amplitude.
Measurement is repeated while changing the OSC amplitude until the amplitude comes
within the permissible error set here.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 1% to 100% and the setting resolution is 1%.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the permissible error with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the permissible error with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [ALC]－[RETRY TIMES]: Set the maximum number of retries.
This sets the maximum number of retries (number of retry measurements) for ALC.
Amplitude adjustment stops when the maximum number of retries set here is reached even
if the amplitude does not come within the permissible error.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 1 to 100 times and the setting resolution is 1.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the maximum number of retries with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the maximum number of retries with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [ALC]－[CORRECTION FACTOR]: Set the correction factor.
This sets the correction factor (control sensitivity) for ALC. Usually, 100% is no problem, but
control may be unstable depending on the DUT. If instability is observed, reduce thecorrection factor.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 1% to 100% and the setting resolution is 1%.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the correction factor with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the correction factor with the knob or cursor keys.

3-46

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [DC BIAS]: Set the DC bias.
This sets the bias for performing spot measurement.
■ [DC BIAS]－[DC BIAS]: Set the DC bias.
This sets the DC bias value.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[SWEEP MIN -> DC BIAS]*: Copy the sweep lower bias value limit to DC BIAS.

・[SWEEP MAX -> DC BIAS]*: Copy the sweep upper bias value limit to DC BIAS.

・[MKR -> DC BIAS]*: Copy the bias value of the active marker to DC BIAS.

・[CURR -> DC BIAS]: Copy the current output bias value to DC BIAS.

・[EDIT]: Set the bias with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the bias setting with the knob or cursor keys.

*: Displayed when DC bias sweep.
■ [DC BIAS]－[HV BIAS]: Set the HV DC bias.
This enables or disables high voltage bias (HV bias).
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・OFF: Disable HV bias.

・ON: Enable HV bias.

(Supplementary explanation)
・ The HV DC bias can be set only when the measurement mode is IMPD−3T and
IMPD−2T. This menu is not displayed when in another measurement mode
(IMPD−EXT and G−PH).
・ The HV DC bias is output from either the HCUR/OSC connector on the front panel(when IMPD−3T) or PORT3 connector on the front panel (when IMPD−2T). The HV
DC bias cannot be output from the rear panel DC BIAS OUT connector.
■ [DC BIAS]－[OUTPUT CONNECTOR]: Set the DC bias output connector.
This sets the connector to output the DC bias.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・FRONT : Output the bias from the OSC connector on the front panel.
・REAR: Output the bias from the DC BIAS OUT connector on the rear panel.

3-47

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [POWER AMP GAIN]: Set the DUT drive amplifier gain.
This sets the DUT drive amplifier gain (amplification factor) for amplifying the signal output
from the OSC connector.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is ±(1.00E-12 to 1.00E+12) and the setting resolution is 3 digits.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the gain with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the gain with the knob or cursor keys.
(Supplementary explanation)
・This setting is enabled when the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT and G−PH. Whenthe measurement mode is IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T, operation is performed as if +1.00
is set.
・When the DUT drive amplifier gain is set, the amplitude and DC bias set on this
instrument become not the levels output from the OSC connector of this instrument
but the levels actually applied to the DUT.
・If a DUT drive amplifier will not be used, use this instrument with this set to 1.00.
■ [AUX PORT SET]: Set the AUX connector port.
This sets the digital output port value that is output from the AUX connector on the rear panel.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 0 to 15 and the setting resolution is 1.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the output value with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the output value with the knob or cursor keys.
(Supplementary explanation)
For details on the AUX connector, refer to “1.19 Setting AUX Port” in Instruction Manual(Advanced).
■ [ON/OFF SYNC]: Set measurement synchronous driving.
Measurement synchronous driving is a function to output a signal only during measurement.
Use this when you wish to apply a signal to the DUT only during measurement. Output
turns on when measurement starts and turns off automatically when measurement ends.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・ASYNC: Turn measurement synchronous driving off. Output on/off control is
not performed in synchronization with measurement.

・SYNC(AC+DC) : Turn measurement synchronous driving on. The AC and DC outputs
are both turned on when measurement starts, and are both turned
off when measurement ends.
3-48

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference: Turn measurement synchronous driving on. Only the AC output is・SYNC(AC)turned on when measurement starts and only the AC output isturned off when measurement ends. DC on/off control is not
performed.
If repeat measurement is performed while measurement synchronous driving is on, theoutput is turned off each time for each measurement is completed for either spotmeasurement or sweep measurement.
■ [ON/OFF MODE]: Set the ON/OFF mode.
This sets the state for when measurement signal output is turned on/off. This is used to
avoid sudden signal changes such as when the device under test is a mechanical system.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・QUICK: Turn on/off instantly. When this is on, oscillation starts with a phase of 0°.

・SLOW: Turn the output on/off slowly over a period of about 10 seconds.

・0° SYNC: Turn output off after waiting until the 0° phase. When this is on,
oscillation starts with a phase of 0°.

When 0° SYNC is set, it takes up to one cycle of the signal at the longest from the time theoutput off operation is performed to the time the output is actually turned off. Please notethat at 10 µHz it takes up to 105 seconds (about 27.8 hours) at the longest.
■ [FREQ CHNG MODE]: Set the phase for when the frequency changes.
This sets whether to change the frequency instantly or to wait until the 0° phase whenchanging the frequency. When performing measurement such as electrochemical impedance
measurement, the total charge transfer to the DUT can be made zero because the areas ofthe positive and negative sides of an AC sinusoidal signal match.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・ASYNC: Change the frequency instantly.

・0° SYNC: Change the frequency after waiting until the 0° phase.

When 0° SYNC is set, it takes up to one cycle of the measurement signal at the longest until
the frequency is changed (including when a sweep is in progress). Please note that at 10 µHz
it takes up to 105 seconds (about 27.8 hours) at the longest.
■ [10MHz REF IN]: Set the reference clock input.
This is used to improve the frequency accuracy and stability by using an external reference
clock that is more accurate than the internal reference clock of this instrument. This is also
used to make the frequency accuracy common among multiple devices.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・DISABLE : Use the internal reference clock.
3-49

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference
・ENABLE: Use an external reference clock if an external reference clock is available.

Even if ENABLE is set, the internal reference clock of this instrument will be used if anexternal reference clock is not detected or if the frequency differs from the specified frequency.
The reference clock with which this instrument is currently operating is indicated by thestatus display in the upper part of the LCD screen.
(Nothing is displayed): Operating with the internalreference clock.
REF: Operating with the external reference clock.
REF (flashing): Operating with the internalreference clock. (An external reference clock has
not been detected.)■ [10MHz REF OUT]: Set the reference clock output.
This is set when the reference clock with which this instrument is operating is output fromthe 10MHz REF OUT connector on the rear panel. This is used to make the frequency
accuracy common among this instrument and other devices.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・DISABLE : Do not output the reference clock.
・ENABLE: Output the reference clock.

When this instrument is operating with an external reference clock, the same frequency asthat reference clock is output.

3-50

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.3 Measure Menu

■ [PRMTR1] to [PRMTR6]: Set the spot measurement item.
This sets the measurement item (display item) for spot measurement.
○ Setting procedure<Palette operations (immediate settings)>(Measurement modes: IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T, and IMPD−2T)
・Z: Magnitude of impedance (Ω)

・θZ: Phase of impedance (°)

・Y: Magnitude of admittance (S)・θY: Phase of admittance (°)

・R: Resistance (Ω)

・X: Reactance (Ω)

・G: Conductance (S)・B: Susceptance (S)・CS: Series capacitance (F)・CP: Parallel capacitance (F)・D: Dissipation factor (unitless number)・QC: Quality coefficient of capacitor (unitless number)

・LS: Series inductance (H)・LP: Parallel inductance (H)・QL: Quality coefficient of inductor (unitless number)

・RS: Series resistance (Ω)

・RP: Parallel resistance (Ω)

・V1: PORT1 amplitude (Vrms)

When measurement mode is IMPD−EXT・V2: PORT2 amplitude (Vrms)

When measurement mode is IMPD−EXT・V: Voltage amplitude (Vrms)

When measurement mode is IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T・I: Current amplitude (Arms)

When measurement mode is IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T・εS: Relative permittivity (unitless number)・εS': Real part of relative permittivity (unitless number)
3-51

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference・εS'': Imaginary part of relative permittivity (unitless number)・Dε: Dissipation factor of relative permittivity (unitless number)・µS: Relative permeability (unitless number)・µS': Real part of relative permeability (unitless number)・µS'': Imaginary part of relative permeability (unitless number)・Dµ: Dissipation factor of relative permeability (unitless number)・FREQUENCY : Frequency (Hz)・STATUS : Status information of measurement range, etc.
・NA

: (No display)(Measurement mode: G−PH)
・dBR: Gain (dB)・R

: Gain (unitless number)・a: Real part of gain (unitless number)・b: Imaginary part of gain (unitless number)・θ: Phase (°)

・V1: PORT1 amplitude (Vrms)

・V2: PORT2 amplitude (Vrms)

・FREQUENCY : Frequency (Hz)・STATUS : Status information of measurement range, etc.
・NA

: (No display)

The measurement item list palette is displayed. Tap to select the items to measure/display.
If you select “NA,” that item will be hidden.
For details on each of the parameters, refer to “4.6 Setting Spot Measurement”.
(Supplementary explanation)
The V1, V2, V, and I measurement items are the voltage and current amplitude values
measured by this instrument. The impedance and gain are calculated and displayed basedon these measurement values, but the (V÷I) and Z and the (V1÷V2) and R do not matchexactly because various error processing is performed inside this instrument. In particular,
please note that the difference between both of them will be extremely large when
open/short/load correction, port extension, and equalizing are performed.
■ [MEASURE TIME]: Set the measurement time.
This sets the time per measurement. Increasing the time results in more measurement data
being averaged to reduce noise and obtain cleaner measurement results, but measurement
will become longer. For details on the averaging operation, refer to “1.1 Setting Measurement
Time” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 0 to 9,990 seconds and the setting resolution is 3 digits or 0.1 ms,
whichever is the largest. Even if 0 second is set, measurement is performed for a timeequivalent to 1 cycle of the measurement frequency (= 1 / frequency).
3-52

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the measurement time with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the measurement time with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [START DELAY]: Set the measurement start delay time.
This sets the delay time for when sweep measurement starts and spot measurement starts.
Set this for when a transient response is generated in the circuit under test due to a largechange in the frequency, measurement signal amplitude, or DC bias. For details on the delay,
refer to “1.2 Setting Delay” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 0 to 9,990 seconds and the setting resolution is 3 digits or 0.1 ms,
whichever is the largest.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the measurement start delay time with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the measurement start delay time with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [MEASURE DELAY]: Set the measurement delay time.
This sets the delay time until measurement starts after a parameter (frequency,
measurement signal amplitude, or DC bias) changes during a sweep. Set this in particularwhen measuring a DUT with abrupt changes in frequency characteristics. For details on the
delay, refer to “1.2 Setting Delay” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 0 to 9,990 seconds and the setting resolution is 3 digits or 0.1 ms,
whichever is the largest.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the measurement delay time with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the measurement delay time with the knob or cursor keys.

3-53

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [TRIGGER SOURCE]: Select the trigger source.
This selects the measurement start (trigger) source. If this is not selected, a trigger from a
trigger source will be disabled.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・PANEL: The MEASURE START UP, DOWN, and SPOT keys on the front panel are
trigger sources.

・REMOTE : The remote interfaces (USB, GPIB, RS-232, and LAN) are trigger sources.
・HANDLER : The handler interface is a trigger source.
(Supplementary explanation)
・When the measurement mode is G−PH, the handler interface cannot be set to thetrigger source.
■ [REPEAT]: Set the repeat mode.
If repeat is on, the measurement is repeated. For sweep measurement, the sweep
measurement is started again. The measurement is repeated until the STOP key is pressed.
If repeat is off, the measurement is performed one time and then ends.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・OFF: Turn repeat off.

・ON

: Turn repeat on.

(Supplementary explanation)
・Repeat can be set to ON only when the trigger source setting is set to PANEL. Refer to“■ [TRIGGER SOURCE]” in “3.5.3 Measure Menu”.
・This has the same function as the REPEAT key on the front panel.

3-54

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.4 Sweep Menu

■ [SEQ SWEEP]: Set sequence measurement.
This function performs measurements in the order set in the setting memory of this
instrument. It allows, for example, dividing the sweep range to perform measurement withdifferent conditions. For details on sequence measurement, refer to “1.9 Sequence
Measurement” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is OFF and 1 to 32 and the setting resolution is 1.
○ Functions of function keys
・[OFF]: Do not perform sequence measurement.

・[EDIT]: Set the maximum sequence number with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the maximum sequence number with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [SEQ TRIGGER]: Set the trigger for sequence measurement.
If AUTO is set, measurement is performed automatically for one cycle of the entire sequencewith one press of the SWEEP UP or SWEEP DOWN key. If STEP is set, this instrument
enters the wait state each time one setting memory is loaded. Pressing the SWEEP UP or
SWEEP DOWN key again will perform measurement with that setting memory. Use this, forexample, when changing the external device connection for each sequence.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・AUTO: Auto trigger (Execute the entire sequences automatically.)・STEP: Step trigger (Wait at every sequence step.)

3-55

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [SWEEP ITEM]: Set the sweep item.
This selects the parameter to sweep. The parameter set here becomes the X-axis of thegraph.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・FREQUENCY: Sweep the frequency.

・AMPLITUDE: Sweep the measurement signal amplitude.

・DC BIAS: Sweep the DC bias.

・ZERO−SPAN: Keep the measurement conditions constant (zero-span sweep).

■ [SWEEP UPPER]: Set the sweep upper limit.
■ [SWEEP LOWER]: Set the sweep lower limit.
This sets the upper and lower limits of the range for performing sweep measurements.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
When a frequency sweep is performed, the range is 10 µHz to 36 MHz (resolution of 10 µHz).
When an measurement signal amplitude sweep or a DC bias sweep is performed, the setting
range differs depending on the DUT drive amplifier gain setting (set based on the AC
amplitude or DC bias applied to the DUT). Furthermore, there is the limitation of lower limit< upper limit. When a zero-span sweep is performed, this setting is not applied (it isdisabled).
○ Functions of function keys
・[MKR -> SWEEP]: Set the smaller and larger of MARKER1 and MARKER2 to
LOWER and UPPER, respectively.

・[GRAPH -> SWEEP] : Set the current graph X-axis range to the sweep range.
・[MKR -> UPPER]: Set the value of the active marker as the sweep upper limit.

・[MKR -> LOWER]: Set the value of the active marker as the sweep lower limit.

・[EDIT]: Set the sweep upper limit and lower limit with the numericalinput palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the sweep upper limit and lower limit with the knob or
cursor keys.

3-56

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [RESOLUTION]: Set the sweep resolution.
This sets the sweep resolution. The number of data points obtained in a sweep measurement
is the resolution value set here + 1.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 3 to 2,000 and the setting resolution is 1. Either linear sweep or log sweep
can be selected. When the sweep item is DC bias or zero span, log sweep cannot be selected.
○ Functions of function keys
・[LOG]: Log sweep

・[LIN]: Linear sweep

・[EDIT]: Set the sweep resolution with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the sweep resolution with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [SLOW SWEEP]: Automatic high density sweep■ [SLOW SWEEP]－[FUNCTION]: Enable or disable the automatic high density sweep
This sets whether or not to perform an automatic high density sweep. For details on
automatic high density sweep, refer to “1.5 Automatic High Density Sweep” in Instruction
Manual (Advanced).
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・OFF: Disable the automatic high density sweep function.

・ON: Enable the automatic high density sweep function.

Even if this is set to OFF, the parameters related to the automatic high density sweep are not changed.
■ [SLOW SWEEP]－[TYPE]: Select the monitoring parameter type.
This sets the parameter type to monitor for sudden changes in characteristics when
performing an automatic high density sweep.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>(Measurement modes: IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T, and IMPD−2T)・Z: Monitor sudden changes in the magnitude of impedance (|Z|).

・Y: Monitor sudden changes in the magnitude of admittance (|Y|).

・θ

: Monitor sudden changes in the phase (°).

(Measurement mode: G−PH)・dBR: Monitor sudden changes in the ratio (dB) between PORT1 and PORT2.

・R: Monitor sudden changes in the ratio (unitless number) between PORT1 and PORT2.

・θ: Monitor sudden changes in the phase difference (°) between PORT1 and PORT2.

3-57

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [SLOW SWEEP]－[VARIATION]: Set the threshold value for the amount of change.
This sets the threshold value for the amount of parameter change that is regarded as asudden change. The value is stored internally for each parameter type that is set in [TYPE].
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
: Set the threshold value with the numerical input palette.

・[EDIT]・[MODIFY] : Modify the threshold value with the knob or cursor keys.
The setting range and resolution differ depending on the type of parameter.
TYPE=Z: The setting range is 1a to 999 GΩ and the resolution is 3 digits or
1 aΩ, whichever is the largest.

Y: The setting range is 1a to 999 GS and the resolution is 3 digits or
1 aS, whichever is the largest.

θ: The setting range is 0.001 to 179.999° and the resolution is 0.001°.

dBR: The setting range is 0.001 to 999.999 dB and the resolution is 0.001 dB.

R: The setting range is 1a to 999 G and the resolution is 3 digits or 1 a,whichever is the largest.

■ [RESONANT TRACK]: Set the resonant frequency tracking.
■ [RESONANT TRACK]－[FUNCTION]: Enable or disable resonant frequency tracking
measurement.
This sets whether or not to perform resonant frequency tracking measurement. For details
on resonant frequency tracking measurement, refer to “1.10 Resonant Frequency Tracking
Measurement” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・OFF: Disable resonant frequency tracking measurement.

・ON: Enable resonant frequency tracking measurement.

3-58

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [RESONANT TRACK]－[UPPER FREQ]: Set the tracking frequency upper limit.
■ [RESONANT TRACK]－[LOWER FREQ]: Set the tracking frequency lower limit.
This sets the frequency range for performing resonant frequency tracking.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[SWEEP -> RANGE] : Set the same range as the frequency sweep measurement setting.
・[MKR -> RANGE]: Set the smaller and larger of MARKER1 and MARKER2 to
LOWER FREQ and UPPER FREQ, respectively.

・[MKR -> UPPER]: Set the value of the active marker as the tracking frequency upper limit.

・[MKR -> LOWER]: Set the value of the active marker as the tracking frequency lower limit.

・[EDIT]: Set the tracking frequency upper and lower limits with thenumerical input palette.
: Modify the tracking frequency upper and lower limits with the・[MODIFY]

knob or cursor keys.
■ [RESONANT TRACK]－[TARGET PHASE]: Set the phase for resonant frequency.
This sets the phase for resonant frequency. Usually 0° should be used, but you can also set
the phase shift portion depending on the measurement system.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the phase for resonance with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the phase for resonance with the knob or cursor keys.
The setting range is –179.999° to +180.000° and the setting resolution is 0.001°.
■ [RESONANT TRACK]－[TOLERANCE]: Set the permissible error.
This sets the permissible error of the phase for tracking. Measurement is repeated whilechanging the frequency until the frequency comes within the permissible error set here.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 0.001° to +179.999° and the setting resolution is 0.001°.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the permissible error with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the permissible error with the knob or cursor keys.

3-59

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [RESONANT TRACK]－[POLARITY]: Set the phase characteristic polarity of the DUT.
This specifies the slope (polarity) of the DUT phase - frequency characteristic.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・POSITIVE : Increase the phase as the frequency increases.
・NEGATIVE : Decrease the phase as the frequency increases.
■ [RESONANT TRACK]－[CORRECTION FACTOR]: Set the correction factor.
This sets the correction factor (tracking sensitivity) for resonant frequency tracking. Usually,
100% is no problem, but tracking control may be unstable depending on the DUT or
measurement speed setting. If instability is observed, reduce the correction factor.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 1% to 100% and the setting resolution is 1%.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the correction factor with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the correction factor with the knob or cursor keys.

3-60

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.5 Graph Menu

■ [TITLE SET]: Set the graph title.
This sets the graph title.
○ Setting procedure<Text settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Text settings>
Up to 63 characters can be entered.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the title with the text input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the title with the knob or cursor keys.

3-61

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [DISPLAY MODE X]: Set the X-axis format.
This sets the format (type) of the X-axis.
○ Setting procedure<Palette operations (immediate settings)>
There are formats that cannot be selected depending on the setting of the Y-axis format. For
details, refer to “4.5 Setting Sweep Measurement”.
(Measurement modes: IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T, and IMPD−2T)
・SWEEP : The X-axis is a sweep parameter (one of frequency, measurement signal
amplitude, DC bias, and time).
・R: The X-axis is resistance.

・G: The X-axis is conductance.

(Measurement mode: G−PH)
・SWEEP : The X-axis is a sweep parameter (one of frequency, measurement signal
amplitude, DC bias, and time).
・θ: The X-axis is phase.

・a: The X-axis is real part of gain.

(All measurement modes)
・[LOG]: The X-axis is the logarithmic axis.

・[LIN]: The X-axis is the linear axis.

■ [DISPLAY MODE Y]： Set the Y-axis formats.
This sets the format (type) of the Y1-axis and Y2-axis.
○ Setting procedure<Palette operations (immediate settings)>
There are formats that cannot be selected depending on the setting of the X-axis format. For
details, refer to “4.5 Setting Sweep Measurement”.
(Measurement modes: IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T, and IMPD−2T)
・Z−θZ: The Y1-axis is impedance (Ω) and the Y2-axis is phase (°) of impedance.

・Y−θY: The Y1-axis is admittance (S) and the Y2-axis is phase (°) of admittance.

・R−X: The Y1-axis is resistance (Ω) and the Y2-axis is reactance (Ω).

・G−B

: The Y1-axis is conductance (S) and the Y2-axis is susceptance (S).

・CS−RS: The Y1-axis is series capacitance (F) and the Y2-axis is series resistance (Ω).

・CS−D: The Y1-axis is series capacitance (F) and the Y2-axis is dissipation factor(unitless number).

・CS−QC: The Y1-axis is series capacitance (F) and the Y2-axis is quality coefficient(unitless number).

・CP−RP: The Y1-axis is parallel capacitance (F) and the Y2-axis is parallel resistance (Ω).

・CP−D: The Y1-axis is parallel capacitance (F) and the Y2-axis is dissipation factor(unitless number).

・CP−QC: The Y1-axis is parallel capacitance (F) and the Y2-axis is quality coefficient(unitless number).
3-62

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference
・LS−RS: The Y1-axis is series inductance (H) and the Y2-axis is series resistance (Ω).

・LS−QL: The Y1-axis is series inductance (H) and the Y2-axis is quality coefficient(unitless number).

・LP−RP: The Y1-axis is parallel inductance (H) and the Y2-axis is parallel resistance (Ω).

・LP−QL: The Y1-axis is parallel inductance (H) and the Y2-axis is quality coefficient(unitless number).

・εS−Dε: The Y1-axis is relative permittivity (unitless number) and the Y2-axis isdissipation factor (unitless number).

・εS'−εS'': The Y1-axis is real part of relative permittivity (unitless number) and theY2-axis is imaginary part of relative permittivity (unitless number).

・µS−Dµ: The Y1-axis is relative permeability (unitless number) and the Y2-axis isdissipation factor (unitless number).

・µS'−µS'': The Y1-axis is real part of relative permeability (unitless number) and theY2-axis is imaginary part of relative permeability (unitless number).

・V1−V2: The Y1-axis is PORT1 amplitude (Vrms) and the Y2-axis is PORT2
amplitude (Vrms).
When the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT

・V−I: The Y1-axis is voltage amplitude (Vrms) and the Y2-axis is current
amplitude (Arms).
When the measurement mode is IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T

・FREQUENCY−θZ : The Y1-axis is frequency (Hz) and the Y2-axis is phase (°) of impedance.
・X: The Y1-axis is reactance (Ω) and the Y2-axis is nothing.

・−X: The Y1-axis is reactance (Ω) with top and bottom inverted and the Y2-axis
is nothing.
The upward direction of the Y1-axis is negative, and the downward
direction is positive.

・B: The Y1-axis is susceptance (S) and the Y2-axis is nothing.

(Measurement mode: G−PH)・dBR−θ

: The Y1-axis is gain (dB) and the Y2-axis is phase (°).

・R−θ: The Y1-axis is gain (unitless number) and the Y2-axis is the phase (°).

・a−b

: The Y1-axis is real part of gain (unitless number) and the Y2-axis isimaginary part of gain (unitless number).

・dBR−GD : The Y1-axis is gain (dB) and the Y2-axis is group delay (s).
・R−GD

: The Y1-axis is gain (unitless number) and the Y2-axis is group delay (s).

・V1−V2: The Y1-axis is PORT1 amplitude (Vrms) and the Y2-axis is PORT2
amplitude (Vrms).

・FREQUENCY−θ

: The Y1-axis is frequency (Hz) and the Y2-axis is phase (°).

・R

: The Y1-axis is gain (unitless number) and the Y2-axis is nothing.

・dBR: The Y1-axis is gain (dB) and the Y2-axis is nothing.

・b: The Y1-axis is imaginary part of gain (unitless number) and the Y2-axis isnothing.
3-63

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference(All measurement modes)
・[Y1 LOG] : The Y1-axis is the logarithmic axis.
・[Y1 LIN] : The Y1-axis is the linear axis.
・[Y2 LOG] : The Y2-axis is the logarithmic axis.
・[Y2 LIN] : The Y2-axis is the linear axis.
(Supplementary explanation)
The V1, V2, V, and I measurement items are the voltage and current amplitude values
measured by this instrument. The impedance and gain are calculated and displayed basedon these measurement values, but the (V÷I) and Z and the (V1÷V2) and R do not matchexactly because various error processing is performed inside this instrument. In particular,
please note that the difference between both of them will be extremely large when
open/short/load correction, port extension, and equalizing are performed.
■ [DISPLAY TRACE]: Set the display of data.
■ [DISPLAY TRACE]－[MEAS]: Set the display of measurement data.
■ [DISPLAY TRACE]－[REF1]: Set the display of reference data 1.
■ [DISPLAY TRACE]－[REF2]: Set the display of reference data 2.
:■ [DISPLAY TRACE]－[REF8]: Set the display of reference data 8.
This selects the data to display on the graph.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・ON: Display data.

・OFF: Do not display data.

For details on graph traces, refer to “4.5 Setting Sweep Measurement”.
■ [SCALE]: Set the graph axes.
This selects automatic setting or manual setting of the X, Y1, and Y2 axes of a graph.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・AUTO: Automatically determine (auto scale) the axis ranges so that all of the data
is displayed.

・AUTO−R : Auto scale to axis ranges suitable for an Nyquist plot and Cole-cole plot.
The X-axis and Y-axes become the same scale.
・FIX: Fix the graph axis range. This is set manually.

3-64

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [SCALE RANGE]: Set the graph axis ranges.
■ [SCALE RANGE]－[X MAX]: Set the maximum X-axis value.
■ [SCALE RANGE]－[X MIN]: Set the minimum X-axis value.
■ [SCALE RANGE]－[Y1 MAX]: Set the maximum Y1-axis value.
■ [SCALE RANGE]－[Y1 MIN]: Set the minimum Y1-axis value.
■ [SCALE RANGE]－[Y2 MAX]: Set the maximum Y2-axis value.
■ [SCALE RANGE]－[Y2 MIN]: Set the minimum Y2-axis value.
This sets the range of each axis.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[DATA -> SCALE]: Set the X-, Y1-, and Y2-axis ranges according to the data.

・[X DATA -> SCALE]: Set the X-axis range according to the data.

・[X DATA MAX-> SCALE]: Set the maximum X-axis value according to the data.

・[X DATA MIN-> SCALE]: Set the minimum X-axis value according to the data.

・[Y1 DATA -> SCALE]: Set the Y1-axis range according to the data.

・[Y1 DATA MAX-> SCALE] : Set the maximum Y1-axis value according to the data.
・[Y1 DATA MIN-> SCALE] : Set the minimum Y1-axis value according to the data.
・[Y2 DATA -> SCALE]: Set the Y2-axis range according to the data.

・[Y2 DATA MAX-> SCALE] : Set the maximum Y2-axis value according to the data.
・[Y2 DATA MIN-> SCALE] : Set the minimum Y2-axis value according to the data.
・[EDIT]: Set the axis ranges with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the axis ranges with the knob or cursor keys.

■ [STYLE]: Set the graph style.
This selects the graph style for displaying measurement data.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・SINGLE : Display one graph.
・SPLIT: Display two graphs, one above the other.

■ [GRID]: Set the grid display targets.
This sets the axes for which to display grids.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・OFF: Do not display a grid.

・X: Display a grid for the X-axis only.

・X−Y1: Display grids for the X-axis and Y1-axis.

・X−Y2: Display grids for the X-axis and Y2-axis.

・X−Y1−Y2 : Display grids for the X-axis, Y1-axis and Y2-axis.

3-65

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [GRID LINE STYLE]: Set the grid lines.
This sets the grid line style.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・BROKEN LINE : Display a broken-line grid.
: Display a solid-line grid.

・SOLID LINE

■ [PHASE RANGE]: Set the phase display range.
This sets the phase display range.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>・±180°: Display the phase within the range of −180° ≦θ < +180°.

・0° to +360° : Display the phase within the range of 0° ≦θ < +360°.
・−360° to 0° : Display the phase within the range of −360° ≦θ < 0°.
・UNWRAP: Display the unwrapped phase.

○ Functions of function keys
・[+360°]: Display the phase with 360° added.

・[−360°]: Display the phase with 360° subtracted.

(Supplementary explanation)
This function is valid when the phase display range is UNWRAP.
■ [APERTURE]: Set the number of moving average data points (aperture).
This sets the number of moving average phase data points (number of frequency measurement
points) for obtaining the group delay characteristic. Although this affects the display of thegroup delay, it does not affect the display of the phase. The group delay characteristic issmoother when the aperture is increased, but sudden changes are not observed.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is the even values of 2 to 200 and the setting resolution is 2.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the aperture with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the aperture with the knob or cursor keys.

3-66

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [PLOT COLOR]: Set the data trace colors.
■ [PLOT COLOR]－[MEAS Y1]: Set the color of Y1 of the measurement data.
■ [PLOT COLOR]－[MEAS Y2]: Set the color of Y2 of the measurement data.
■ [PLOT COLOR]－[REF1 Y1]: Set color of Y1 of reference data 1.
■ [PLOT COLOR]－[REF1 Y2]: Set color of Y2 of reference data 1.
...
■ [PLOT COLOR]－[REF8 Y1]: Set color of Y1 of reference data 8.
■ [PLOT COLOR]－[REF8 Y2]: Set color of Y2 of reference data 8.
○ Functions of function keys
・[(Standard Color 1)] : Standard trace color 1・[(Standard Color 2)] : Standard trace color 2...
・[(Standard Color 9)] : Standard trace color 9・[(Arbitrary Color)]: Display the color selection palette.

■ [PLOT COLOR]－[GRADATION]:

Automatically set the reference data trace colors bychanging the gradation.

This automatically sets the colors of the REF1 to REF8 reference data traces based on thecolor of the MEAS trace by changing the gradation. The colors are set automatically bymaking them lighter in the order of REF1 to REF8.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[EXEC]: Automatically set the reference data trace colors by changing thegradation.

■ [PLOT COLOR]－[DEFAULT]: Return the data trace colors to the initial settings.
This returns the colors of the MEAS and REF1 to REF8 traces to the initial settings (factory
default values). Settings other than the trace colors are not changed.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[EXEC]: Initialize the data trace colors.

3-67

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.6 Marker Menu

■ [ACTIVE]: Set the active marker.
This specifies the active marker (move the focus by knob operation to specify the marker forwhich to display read values on the graph).
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 1 (= MARKER1) to 8 (= MARKER8) and the setting resolution is 1.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the active marker with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the active marker with the knob or cursor keys.

■ [SEARCH]: Perform a marker search.
This performs a marker search. Select the search method with the function keys. Tapping ona function key begins a search and moves the marker to the data position of the search result.
For details on marker operations and searches, refer to “1.7 Marker Operations” in Instruction
Manual (Advanced).

3-68

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [SEARCH]－[X]: Execute an X-axis search.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>○ Functions of function keys
(When the graph X-axis is SWEEP)・[X MIN]: Move to the position at which the X value is the minimum.

・[X MAX]: Move to the position at which the X value is the maximum.

・[X]: Move to the position of the X value set by [SEARCH VALUE]－[X].
If there are multiple positions, the marker moves to the position where
the Y value is the minimum.

・[⊿X]: Move to the position where the difference from MARKER1 is the value
set by [SEARCH VALUE]－[⊿X]. If there are multiple positions, themarker moves to the position where the Y value is the minimum.

(When the graph X-axis is other than SWEEP, the following search functions are alsoavailable.)・[PREV X]: Move to the position of the next smaller Y value.

・[NEXT X]: Move to the position of the next larger Y value.

・[PREV ⊿X]: Move to the position of the next smaller Y value of [⊿X].

・[NEXT ⊿X]: Move to the position of the next larger Y value of [⊿X].

・[X BOTTOM]: Move to the position where the X value is the minimal. If there
are multiple positions, the marker moves to the position where
the X value is the minimum.

・[PREV X BOTTOM]: Move to the position of the next larger X value of [X BOTTOM].

・[NEXT X BOTTOM]: Move to the position of the next smaller X value of [X BOTTOM].

・[X PEAK]: Move to the position where the X value is the maximal. If there
are multiple positions, the marker moves to the position where
the X value is the maximum.

・[PREV X PEAK]: Move to the position of the next smaller X value of [X PEAK].

・[NEXT X PEAK]: Move to the position of the next larger X value of [X PEAK].

(Supplementary explanation)
The marker that moves is the active marker.
■ [SEARCH]－[Y1]: Execute a Y1-axis search.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>○ Functions of function keys
・[Y1 MIN]: Move to the position at which the Y1 value is the minimum.

・[Y1 MAX]: Move to the position at which the Y1 value is the maximum.

・[Y1]: Move to the position of the Y1 value set by [SEARCH VALUE]－[Y1]. If there are multiple positions, the marker moves to theposition where the X value is the minimum.
3-69

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference
・[PREV Y1]: Move to the position of the next smaller X value of [Y1].

・[NEXT Y1]: Move to the position of the next larger X value of [Y1].

・[⊿ Y1]: Move to the position where the difference from MARKER1 isthe value set by [SEARCH VALUE]－[⊿Y1]. If there are multiple
positions, the marker moves to the position where the X value isthe minimum.

・[PREV ⊿Y1]

: Move to the position of the next smaller X value of [⊿Y1].

・[NEXT ⊿Y1]

: Move to the position of the next larger X value of [⊿Y1].

・[Y1 BOTTOM]: Move to the position where the Y1 value is the minimal. If there
are multiple positions, the marker moves to the position where
the Y1 value is the minimum.

・[PREV Y1 BOTTOM] : Move to the position of the next smaller Y1 value of [Y1 BOTTOM].
・[NEXT Y1 BOTTOM] : Move to the position of the next larger Y1 value of [Y1 BOTTOM].
・[Y1 PEAK]: Move to the position where the Y1 value is the maximal. If
there are multiple positions, the marker moves to the position
where the Y1 value is the maximum.

・[PREV Y1 PEAK]: Move to the position of the next smaller Y1 value of [Y1 PEAK].

・[NEXT Y1 PEAK]: Move to the position of the next larger Y1 value of [Y1 PEAK].

(Supplementary explanation)
The marker that moves is the active marker.
■ [SEARCH]－[Y2]: Execute a Y2-axis search.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>○ Functions of function keys
(When the graph X-axis is SWEEP)・[Y2 MIN]: Move to the position at which the Y2 value is the minimum.

・[Y2 MAX]: Move to the position at which the Y2 value is the maximum.

・[Y2]: Move to the position of the Y2 value set by [SEARCH VALUE]－[Y2]. If there are multiple positions, the marker moves to theposition where the X value is the minimum.

・[PREV Y2]: Move to the position of the next smaller X value of [Y2].

・[NEXT Y2]: Move to the position of the next larger X value of [Y2].

・[⊿Y2]: Move to the position where the difference from MARKER1 isthe value set by [SEARCH VALUE] – [⊿Y2]. If there are multiple
positions, the marker moves to the position where the X value isthe minimum.

・[PREV ⊿Y2]

: Move to the position of the next smaller X value of [⊿Y2].

・[NEXT ⊿Y2]

: Move to the position of the next larger X value of [⊿Y2].

・[Y2 BOTTOM]: Move to the position where the Y2 value is the minimal. If there
are multiple positions, the marker moves to the position where
3-70

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference
the Y2 value is the minimum.
・[PREV Y2 BOTTOM] : Move to the position of the next smaller Y2 value of [Y2 BOTTOM].
・[NEXT Y2 BOTTOM] : Move to the position of the next larger Y2 value of [Y2 BOTTOM].
: Move to the position where the Y2 value is the maximal. If

・[Y2 PEAK]

there are multiple positions, the marker moves to the position
where the Y2 value is the maximum.
・[PREV Y2 PEAK]: Move to the position of the next smaller Y2 value of [Y2 PEAK].

・[NEXT Y2 PEAK]: Move to the position of the next larger Y2 value of [Y2 PEAK].

(Supplementary explanation)
When the graph X-axis is other than SWEEP, there are no function keys (no Y2-axis
search function).
The marker that moves is the active marker.
■ [SEARCH]－[BW]: Execute a special marker search.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>○ Functions of function keys
・[BW1]: Execute a marker search for LPF and HPF.

・[BW2]: Execute a marker search for BPF.

・[BW3]: Execute a marker search for BEF.

For details on BW searches, refer to “1.7 Marker Operations” in Instruction Manual(Advanced).
■ [AUTO SEARCH]: Set to search automatically when a sweep ends.
This enables a marker search to be executed automatically when sweep measurement ends.
The search method will be that set in [AUTO SEARCH].
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
The following parameters can be set. For explanations on searches, refer to [SEARCH X],[SEARCH Y1], and [SEARCH Y2].
・OFF

: Do not search automatically.

・X MAX: Automatically search for the maximum X value.

・X MIN: Automatically search for the minimum X value.

・X PEAK: Automatically search for the maximal X value.

・X BOTTOM: Automatically search for the minimal X value.

・Y1 MAX: Automatically search for the maximum Y1 value.

・Y1 MIN: Automatically search for the minimum Y1 value.

・Y1 PEAK: Automatically search for the maximal Y1 value.

・Y1 BOTTOM : Automatically search for the minimal Y1 value.
・Y2 MAX: Automatically search for the maximum Y2 value.

・Y2 MIN: Automatically search for the minimum Y2 value.
3-71

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference: Automatically search for the maximal Y2 value.

・Y2 PEAK・Y2 BOTTOM : Automatically search for the minimal Y2 value.
・X: Automatically search for the X value.

・Y1: Automatically search for the Y1 value.

・Y2: Automatically search for the Y2 value.

・⊿X: Automatically search for the ⊿X value.

・⊿Y1: Automatically search for the ⊿Y1 value.

・⊿Y2: Automatically search for the ⊿Y2 value.

・BW1: Execute a marker search for LPF and HPF. (MARKER1, MARKER2)・BW2: Automatically search for BPF. (MARKER1, MARKER2, MARKER3)・BW3: Automatically search for BEF. (MARKER1, MARKER2, MARKER3)(Supplementary explanation)
The marker that moves is the active marker.
■ [SEARCH VALUE]: Set the search values.

■ [SEARCH VALUE]－[X]: Set the X search value.

■ [SEARCH VALUE]－[Y1]: Set the Y1 search value.

■ [SEARCH VALUE]－[Y2]: Set the Y2 search value.

■ [SEARCH VALUE]－[⊿X]: Set the ⊿X search value.

■ [SEARCH VALUE]－[⊿Y1]: Set the ⊿Y1 search value.

■ [SEARCH VALUE]－[⊿Y2]: Set the ⊿Y2 search value.

This sets the values to be searched by marker.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the search values with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the search values with the knob or cursor keys.

■ [SAVE]: Save the marker values to a USB memory device.
○ Setting procedure<Text settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Text settings>
Input of the extension (.MKR.CSV) is not required.
○ Functions of function keys
・[SAVE]: Save the marker information to a USB memory device.

■ [MARKER1] to [MARKER8]: Set the markers.
■ [MARKER1]－[MODE]: Set the marker 1 mode.
This sets the display mode of marker 1.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・OFF: Hide the marker.
3-72

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference・ON: Display the marker as a normal marker.

■ [MARKERn]－[MODE]: Set the marker n mode. n: 2 to 8
This sets the display mode of markers 2 to 8.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・OFF: Hide the marker.

・NORMAL: Display the marker as a normal marker.

・⊿: Display the information of the difference from MARKER1.

・⊿TRKG: Display the information of the difference from MARKER1. If MARKER1
is moved, the marker is moved to follow MARKER1 so that the SWEEP
value difference is kept constant.

■ [MARKERn]－[TRACE]: Set the marker n target data. n: 1 to 8
This sets the data trace (target) to be read by marker.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・MEAS: Read the values of the measurement data trace.

・REF1: Read the values of reference data trace 1.

・REF2: Read the values of reference data trace 2.

:
・REF8

: Read the values of reference data trace 8.

■ [MARKERn]－[SEQ]: Set marker n target sequence number. n: 1 to 8
This sets the sequence number (1 to 32) of the data (target) to be read by marker.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the target sequence number with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the target sequence number with the knob or cursor keys.

■ [MARKERn]－[POSITION]: Set the marker n SWEEP values. n: 1 to 8
This places the target marker at the nearest SWEEP value of the set values.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[MKR1 -> POSITION]: Move the target marker to the current MARKER1 position.
This is not displayed when the marker is a ⊿marker or⊿TRKG marker.

・[EDIT]: Set the marker position with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the marker position with the knob or cursor keys.
3-73

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.7 Trace Menu

■ [MEAS TRACE COPY]: Select the storage location for measurement data.
This copies the measurement data (MEAS DATA).
■ [MEAS TRACE COPY]－[REF TRACE]: Copy to reference data.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>, <Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>,<Numerical settings>
The setting range is 1 (= REF1) to 8 (= REF8) and the setting resolution is 1.
○ Functions of function keys
・[COPY]: Copy to the specified reference data.

・[EDIT]: Set the reference data copy destination with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the reference data copy destination with the knob or cursor keys.

■ [MEAS TRACE COPY]－[EQU CORR MEM]: Copy to equalizing data.
This can be set only when the measurement mode is G−PH.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>○ Functions of function keys
・[COPY]: Copy to the specified equalizing data.

The equalizing data number (1 to 32) of the copy destination is the number specified in[Calibration]－[EQUALIZING].
■ [MEAS TRACE COPY]－[SHORT CORR MEM]: Copy to short correction data.
■ [MEAS TRACE COPY]－[OPEN CORR MEM]: Copy to open correction data.
■ [MEAS TRACE COPY]－[LOAD CORR MEM]: Copy to load correction data.
3-74

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [MEAS TRACE COPY]－[OPEN_PEXT CORR MEM]:
Copy to port extended end open correction data.
■ [MEAS TRACE COPY]－[SHORT_PEXT CORR MEM]:
Copy to port extended end short correction data.
■ [MEAS TRACE COPY]－[LOAD_PEXT CORR MEM]:
Copy to port extended end load correction data.
This can be set only when the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T, and IMPD−2T.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>○ Functions of function keys
・[COPY]: Copy to the corresponding specified correction data.

The copy destination correction data numbers (1 to 32) are the numbers specified in the following.
[Calibration]－[OPEN CORR]; Open correction data

[Calibration]－[SHORT CORR]; Short correction data

[Calibration]－[LOAD CORR]; Load correction data

[Calibration]－[PORT EXT]－[OPEN_PEXT CORR];
Port extended end open correction data
[Calibration]－[PORT EXT]－[SHORT_PEXT CORR];
Port extended end short correction data
[Calibration]－[PORT EXT]－[LOAD_PEXT CORR];
Port extended end load correction data
For the equalizing, open correction, short correction, and load correction operatingprocedures, refer to “1.8 Error Correction” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
■ [AUTO STORE]: Set automatically copying of the measurement data to the reference data.
This is a function to automatically copy the MEAS data to the REF1 data, the original REF1
data to the REF2 data, the original REF2 data to the REF3 data, and so on every time one
sweep finishes. The last REFn data is discarded.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate execution)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[ON] / [OFF] : Set the automatic copy function to ON or OFF.
・[EDIT]: Set the last reference data copy destination with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the last reference data copy destination with the knob or cursor keys.

The setting range is 1 to 8 and OFF. Specify the last REF data number to copy data. If OFF
is specified, the automatic copy function will turn off.
■ [DELETE MEAS]: Delete the measurement data.
This deletes the measurement data (MEAS DATA) from memory. The graph traces are alsodeleted. The data cannot be recovered after deletion, so save the data to a USB memory
3-75

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference
device or other external storage device if necessary.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[DELETE]: Delete the measurement data.

■ [DELETE REF]: Delete the reference data.
This deletes the reference data (REF DATA) from memory. The graph traces are also deleted.
The data cannot be recovered after deletion, so save the data to a USB memory device orother external storage device if necessary.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings (requiringconfirmation)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 1 (= REF1) to 8 (= REF8) and the setting resolution is 1.
○ Functions of function keys
・[DELETE]: Delete the specified reference data.

・[EDIT]: Set the reference data to delete with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the reference data to delete with the knob or cursor keys.

■ [CONDITION VIEW]: Display the settings at the time of data measurement.
This displays the conditions (excerpt) set at the time the current active data (MEAS DATA or
REF DATA) was measured. Please note that the displayed setting conditions are not thecurrent settings of this instrument.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>
For sequence measurement data, the measurement conditions for each measurement
memory number are displayed. The memory number for which to display measurement
conditions can be changed with the function keys.
○ Functions of function keys
・[PREV]: Display the measurement conditions for the previous memory number.
(This is enabled for sequence measurement data.)

・[NEXT]: Display the measurement conditions for the next memory number.
(This is enabled for sequence measurement data.)(Supplementary explanation)
・FREQUENCY / AMPLITUDE / DC BIAS displayed in CONDITION VIEW indicate thevalues set at the time of measurement even if signal output (OSC) was off at the timeof measurement.
・FREQUENCY of the frequency sweep data is not the frequency at the time of
measurement. Likewise, AMPLITUDE in the measurement signal amplitude sweep
data and DC BIAS in the DC bias sweep data are not the conditions at the time of
3-76

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference
measurement.
・Some measurement conditions are indicated as “NaN” (Not a Number) depending on
the data. For example, MEASURE TIME is indicated as “NaN” for the data ofequivalent circuit estimation results (refer to “1.11 Equivalent Circuit Estimation” inInstruction Manual (Advanced)).

3-77

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.8 Range Menu

IMPD−EXT
G−PH

IMPD−3T
IMPD−2T■ [RANGE PORT1]: Set the port 1 measurement range.
■ [RANGE PORT2]: Set the port 2 measurement range.
This sets the measurement range. (When measurement mode is IMPD−EXT and G−PH)○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>: Set auto range.

・AUTO

・10 mVrms to 7 Vrms : Set a fixed range.
■ [RANGE]: Set the measurement range.
This sets the measurement range. (When measurement mode is IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T)○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・AUTO: Set auto range.

・10 Ω to 1 MΩ

: Set a fixed range.

When the measurement mode is IMPD−2T, the setting range is AUTO and 1 Ω to 1 kΩ.
■ [OVER LEVEL PORT1]: Set the level for port 1 over-level detection.
■ [OVER LEVEL PORT2]: Set the level for port 2 over-level detection.
This sets the level for over-level detection. It can be set when the measurement mode is
IMPD−EXT and G−PH.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the detection level with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the detection level with the knob or cursor keys.

The setting range is 0 to 7 Vrms and the setting resolution is 3 digits or 1 µVrms, whichever
3-78

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Referenceis the largest.
■ [OVER ACT BEEP]: Set the beep operation for over-level detection.
This sets the beep operation for over-level detection.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・ON: Sound a beep upon over-level detection.

・OFF: Do not sound a beep upon over-level detection.

■ [OVER ACT MEAS]: Set the measurement operation for when over-level detection.
This sets the measurement operation for when over-level detection.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・CONT: Continue measurement even when over-level detection.

・STOP: Stop measurement upon over-level detection.

If you set this to STOP and also set [OSC]−[ON/OFF SYNC] to SYNC(AC+DC) or SYNC(AC),measurement signal output turns off automatically upon over-level detection.
■ [WTG FAC PORT1]: Set the PORT1 weighting factor.
■ [WTG FAC PORT2]: Set the PORT2 weighting factor.
This value serves as a multiplier for the measurement result. It can be used as a simple
correction factor for when a probe, amplifier, or shunt resistor is connected to the DUT. Thiscan be set when the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT and G−PH.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the weighting value with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the weighting value with the knob or cursor keys.

The setting range is ±(1.00000E–15 to 999.999E+9) and the setting resolution is 6 digits or
1E-15, whichever is the largest.

3-79

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.9 Storage Menu

For details on operations, refer to “1.17 Memory Operations” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
■ [CONDITION FILE]: Perform setting condition file operations.
Perform operations such as saving and loading the setting information of this instrument.
■ [CONDITION FILE]－[⇒ USB MEMORY]: Switch to the menu for performing measurement
condition file operations for a USB memory device.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate execution)>■ [CONDITION FILE]－[⇒ INT MEMORY]:

Switch to the menu for performing measurement
condition file operations for internal memory.
3-80

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate execution)>■ [CONDITION FILE]－[SAVE]: Save the measurement conditions.
This saves a measurement condition file to the internal memory or a USB memory device.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>, <Text settings (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[SAVE]: Save measurement conditions.

■ [CONDITION FILE]－[LOAD]: Load measurement conditions.
This loads a measurement condition file from the internal memory or a USB memory device.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[LOAD]: Load measurement conditions.

■ [CONDITION FILE]－[DELETE]: Delete a measurement condition file.
This deletes a measurement condition file from the internal memory or a USB memory device.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[DELETE]: Delete a measurement condition file.

■ [CONDITION FILE]－[RENAME]: Rename a measurement condition file.
This renames a measurement condition file when the target is a USB memory device. It
renames a file title when the target is the internal memory.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>, <Text settings (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[RENAME] : Rename a measurement condition file (USB memory device) or title(internal memory).
■ [CONDITION FILE]－[MOVE]: Move a measurement condition file (internal memory).
This move a measurement condition file in the internal memory to another position.
For sequence measurement, the measurement is performed by loading the settings in orderfrom internal memory number 1. Use this function to change the order of measurement
conditions for sequence measurement.

3-81

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>○ Functions of function keys
・[MOVE UP]: The selected measurement condition memory changes positions
with the memory above.

・[MOVE DOWN] : The selected measurement condition memory changes positions
with the memory below.
■ [CONDITION FILE]－[CREATE NEW FOLDER]： Create a sub-folder (USB memory device).
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>, <Text settings (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[CREATE] : Create a new folder.
■ [DATA FILE]: Perform data file operations.
This performs operations such as saving and loading the measurement data.
■ [DATA FILE]－[⇒ USB MEMORY]: Switch to the menu for performing data file operations
for a USB memory device.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate execution)>■ [DATA FILE]－[⇒ INT MEMORY]: Switch to the menu for performing data file operations
for internal memory.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate execution)>■ [DATA FILE]－[SAVE]: Save data.
■ [DATA FILE]－[SAVE]－[MEAS TRACE]: Save measurement data.
This saves measurement data to the internal memory or a USB memory device.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>, <Text settings (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[SAVE]: Save measurement data.

3-82

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [DATA FILE]－[SAVE]－[REF TRACE]: Save reference data.
This saves reference data to the internal memory or a USB memory device.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>, <Text settings (requiringconfirmation)>, <Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[SAVE]: Save reference data.

・[EDIT]: Set the reference data number with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the reference data number with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [DATA FILE]－[LOAD]: Load data.
■ [DATA FILE]－[LOAD]－[MEAS TRACE]: Load to measurement data.
This loads measurement data from the internal memory or a USB memory device.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[LOAD]: Load measurement data.

■ [DATA FILE]－[LOAD]－[REF TRACE]: Load to reference data.
This loads reference data from the internal memory or a USB memory device.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>, <Execution operations(requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[LOAD]: Load reference data.

・[EDIT]: Set the reference data number with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the reference data number with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [DATA FILE]－[LOAD]－[EQU CORR MEM]

: Load to equalizing data.

■ [DATA FILE]－[LOAD]－[OPEN CORR MEM]

: Load to open correction data.

■ [DATA FILE]－[LOAD]－[SHORT CORR MEM]

: Load to short correction data.

■ [DATA FILE]－[LOAD]－[LOAD CORR MEM]

: Load to load correction data.

■ [DATA FILE]－[LOAD]－[OPEN_PEXT CORR MEM]
: Load to port extended end open correction data.
■ [DATA FILE]－[LOAD]－[SHORT_PEXT CORR MEM]:: Load to port extended end short correction data.
■ [DATA FILE]－[LOAD]－[LOAD_PEXT CORR MEM]:: Load to port extended end load correction data.
This loads each correction data from the internal memory or a USB memory device. The[EQU CORR MEM] load operation can be performed when the measurement mode is G−PH,
and the load operations for other correction data can be performed when the measurement
3-83

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Referencemode is IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T, and IMPD−2T.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[LOAD]: Load each correction data.

The load destination correction data numbers (1 to 32) displayed on the left side of thefunction keys are the numbers set in the following.
[Calibration]－[EQUALIZING]; Equalizing data

[Calibration]－[OPEN CORR]; Open correction data

[Calibration]－[SHORT CORR] ; Short correction data
[Calibration]－[LOAD CORR]; Load correction data

[Calibration]－[PORT EXT]－[OPEN_PEXT CORR]; Port extended end open correction data
[Calibration]－[PORT EXT]－[SHORT_PEXT CORR]:; Port extended end short correction data
[Calibration]－[PORT EXT]－[LOAD_PEXT CORR]:; Port extended end load correction data
The load destination numbers can be modified in the above [Calibration] menu.
■ [DATA FILE]－[DELETE]: Delete a data file.
This deletes a data file from the internal memory or a USB memory device.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[DELETE] : Delete a data file.
■ [DATA FILE]－[RENAME]: Rename a data file.
This renames a data file when the target is a USB memory device. It renames a file title
when the target is the internal memory.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>, <Text settings (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[RENAME] : Rename a data file (USB memory device) or title (internal memory).
■ [DATA FILE]－[CREATE NEW FOLDER]: Create a sub-folder (USB memory device).
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate settings)>, <Text settings (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[CREATE] : Create a new folder.

3-84

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [EJECT]: Eject the USB memory device.
This performs the unmount process to enable the USB memory device to be removed safely.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>○ Functions of function keys
・[EJECT]: Unmount the USB memory device.

When you tap the [EJECT] function key, a process end message will appear. When themessage appears, remove the USB memory device.
A USB memory device left inserted after performing the eject process cannot be accessed. If
removed from the USB port and then reinserted, it will be recognized again and become able
to be accessed.
■ [SCRN COPY FILE NUMBER]： Set the screen copy file numbering.
This sets the initial value of the serial numbers of the screen copy files (.bmp files) saved to a
USB memory device. The number is incremented by one each time a screen copy file is saved
to the USB memory device.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 000 to 999 and the setting resolution is 1.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the file number with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the file number with the knob or cursor keys.

3-85

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.10 Remote Menu

■ Common settings○ Functions of function keys
・[INTERFACE APPLY] : Apply the setting changes to the hardware.
Even if the remote relationship setting is changed, it will not take effect in the hardware
until the [INTERFACE APPLY] function key is pressed.
■ [SELECT]： Select the remote interface.
This selects the communication interface to use.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
3-86

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference・USB: Use USBTMC for communication.

・GPIB: Use GPIB for communication.

・RS-232: Use RS-232 for communication.

・LAN: Use Ethernet for communication.

■ [INTERFACE

USB]: Display the USB information.

There is no item to set. The vendor ID, product ID, and serial number are displayed.
■ [INTERFACEGPIB]: Set GPIB.

■ [INTERFACEGPIB]－[ADDRESS]: Set the GPIB address.

This sets the address for GPIB.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>, <Numerical settings>
The setting range is 0 to 30 and the setting resolution is 1.
○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the address with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the address with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [INTERFACE

RS−232]: Set RS−232.

■ [INTERFACE

RS−232]－[BAUD RATE]: Set the baud rate.

This sets the baud rate for RS-232.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・4800: 4,800 bps

・9600: 9,600 bps

・19200: 19,200 bps

・38400: 38,400 bps

・57600: 57,600 bps

・115200: 115,200 bps

・230400: 230,400 bps■ [INTERFACE

RS−232]－[FLOW CONTROL]: Set flow control.

This sets the flow control for RS-232.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・NONE: No flow control

・SOFT: Software flow control (Xon, Xoff)・HARD: Hardware flow control (RTS, CTS)

3-87

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [INTERFACE RS−232]－[TERMINATOR]: Set the message terminator.
This sets the terminator character for RS-232.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・CR/LF: CR+LF

・LF: LF■ [INTERFACE

LAN]: Set LAN (Ethernet).

■ [INTERFACE

LAN]－[DHCP]: Select the method to determine the IP address.

This sets the method for determining the Ethernet IP address.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・ENABLE: Enable DHCP.

・DISABLE : Disable DHCP (set the IP address manually).
○ Functions of function keys
・[LAN RESET]: Initialize the settings related to the LAN.

■ [INTERFACE

LAN]－[IP ADDRESS]: Set the IP address.

■ [INTERFACE

LAN]－[DEFAULT GATEWAY]: Set the default gateway.

■ [INTERFACE

LAN]－[SUBNET MASK]: Set the subnet mask.

■ [INTERFACE

LAN]－[DNS]: Set the DNS server.

These settings specify the IP address of this instrument, IP address of the default gateway,
IP address of the DNS server, and subnet mask of the LAN.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (immediate settings)>
The setting range for each octet is 0 to 255 and the setting resolution is 1.
○ Functions of function keys
・[MODIFY]: Modify the octets with the knob or cursor keys.

・[LAN RESET]: Initialize the settings related to the LAN.

■ [INTERFACE

LAN]－[PORT NUMBER]: Display the port number.

This is the port number. It cannot be changed.
■ [INTERFACE

LAN]－[MAC ADDRESS]: Display the MAC address.

This is the MAC address of the Ethernet connector of this instrument. It cannot be changed.

3-88

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [HANDLER]: Set the handler interface.
■ [HANDLER]－[TRIGGER POLARITY]: Select the trigger polarity.
Set the trigger polarity (rising or falling).
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・POSITIVE: Trigger on the rising edge.

・NEGATIVE: Trigger on the falling edge.

■ [HANDLER]－[SWEEP DIRECTION]： Set the direction for a sweep using a handler trigger.
This sets the direction for sweep measurement using a handler trigger.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・UP: Start up-sweep measurement with a trigger.

・DOWN: Start down-sweep measurement with a trigger.

・SPOT: Start spot measurement with a trigger.

■ [HANDLER]－[TEST SCREEN]: Display the handler test screen.
This displays a screen to check the connection state of the handler interface and perform
simulation output of comparison results. For the operating procedures, refer to“1.16.3 Handler Interface Test Screen” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>○ Functions of function keys
・[TEST]: Display the handler interface test screen.

3-89

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.11 Calibration Menu

■ [OPEN CORR]: Set open correction.
This sets the open correction function. It can be set when the measurement mode is
IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[ON/OFF]: Enable or disable open correction.

・[MEASURE]: Start correction data measurement (when measurement mode is
IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T only).

・[COPY TO REF8] : Copy the open correction data to reference data 8 (REF8).
・[EDIT]: Set the open correction data number with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the open correction data number with the knob or cursor keys.

The currently set open correction data number is displayed in the menu. When open
correction is turned off, the open correction data number indication becomes “OFF”.
For details on open correction, refer to “1.8.3 Open Correction” in Instruction Manual(Advanced).

3-90

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [SHORT CORR]: Set short correction.
This sets the short correction function. It can be set when the measurement mode is
IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[ON/OFF]: Enable or disable short correction.

・[MEASURE]: Start correction data measurement (when measurement mode is
IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T only).

・[COPY TO REF8] : Copy the short correction data to reference data 8 (REF8).
・[EDIT]: Set the short correction data number with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the short correction data number with the knob or cursor keys.

The currently set short correction data number is displayed in the menu. When shortcorrection is turned off, the short correction data number indication becomes “OFF”.
For details on short correction, refer to “1.8.4 Short Correction” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
■ [LOAD CORR]: Set load correction.
This sets the load correction function. It can be set when the measurement mode is
IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T.
■ [LOAD CORR]－[FUNCTION]: Set load correction.
Enable or disable the load correction function.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[ON/OFF]: Enable or disable load correction.

・[MEASURE]: Start correction data measurement (when measurement mode is
IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T only).

・[COPY TO REF8] : Copy the load correction data to reference data 8 (REF8).
・[EDIT]: Set the load correction data number with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the load correction data number with the knob or cursor keys.

The currently set load correction data number is displayed in the menu. When loadcorrection is turned off, the load correction data number indication becomes “OFF”.
When load correction is enabled, this instrument will operate with open correction and shortcorrection both forcibly enabled internally even if those functions were set to off (disabled).
For details on load correction, refer to “1.8.5 Load Correction” in Instruction Manual(Advanced).

3-91

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [LOAD CORR]－[LOAD STD FMT]: Set the load standard value format.
This specifies the format for when the load standard values are input.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・Cs-D: Specify with the series capacitance and dissipation factor.

・Cp-D: Specify with the parallel capacitance and dissipation factor.

・Rp-Cp: Specify with the parallel resistance and parallel capacitance.

・Rs-Ls: Specify with the series resistance and series inductance.

・Rs-X: Specify with the resistance (series resistance) and reactance.

・Z-θ: Specify with the impedance and phase.

For details on load correction, refer to “1.8.5 Load Correction” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
■ [LOAD CORR]－[LOAD STD VALUE]: Set the load standard values.
This sets the load standard values.
When the menu is tapped, the [[LOAD STANDARD VALUE]] dialog box appears.
Set the frequency and load standard values. Up to 30 sets of load standard values (30frequencies) can be set.
■ [LOAD CORR]－[LOAD STD VALUE]－[[LOAD STANDARD VALUE]]: Specify the load standard values.
Set the frequency and load standard values. Up to 30 sets of load standard values (30frequencies) can be set.
When the parameter is selected and the knob is turned clockwise, the setting item changes in
the order of No. 1 Frequency → No. 1 Standard Value (Y1) → No. 1 Standard Value (Y2) →No. 2 Frequency → No. 2 Standard Value (Y1) → No. 2 Standard Value (Y2) → ...
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[DELETE LINE]: Delete the line.

・[SORT]: Sort the displayed information in frequency ascending order.

・[EDIT]: Set the load standard values with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the load standard values with the knob or cursor keys.

The setting range is 10 µHz to 36 MHz and the setting resolution is 10 µHz for the frequency.
The setting range is –1.0 T to +1.0 T and the setting resolution is 6 digits or 1 a (10–18),
whichever is larger, for the load standard values.
■ [PORT EXT]: Set port extension correction.
This sets the port extension correction function. It can be set when the measurement mode is
IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T.
For details on port extension, refer to “1.8.6 Port Extension” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).

3-92

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [PORT EXT]－[FUNCTION]: Set the port extension correction function to ON or OFF.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>○ Functions of function keys
・[OFF]: Disable the port extension correction function.

・[ON]: Enable the port extension correction function.

■ [PORT EXT]－[Z0]: Set characteristic impedance.
This sets the characteristic impedance of the line for the port extension correction function.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[50Ω]: Set characteristic impedance to 50 Ω.

・[75Ω]: Set characteristic impedance to 75 Ω.

・[EDIT]: Set the characteristic impedance value (unit: Ω) with the numerical input
palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the characteristic impedance value (unit: Ω) with the knob or
cursor keys.
The setting range is 1.00 to 999 Ω and the setting resolution is 3 digits.
■ [PORT EXT]－[ELEC LENGTH]: Set the electrical length.
This sets the electrical length of the line for port extension correction. This is not thephysical length. The electrical length is a value that takes into account the velocity factor.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the electrical length (unit: m) with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the electrical length (unit: m) with the knob or cursor keys.
The setting range is 0.000 to 999.999 m and the setting resolution is 0.001 m (1 mm).

3-93

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [PORT EXT]－[OPEN_PEXT CORR]: Set open correction at port extension tip.
This sets the open correction function at port extension tip. It can be set when themeasurement mode is IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[ON/OFF]: Enable or disable the open correction at port extension tip.

・[MEASURE]: Start correction data measurement (when measurement mode is
IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T only).

・[COPY TO REF8] : Copy the open correction data at port extension tip to reference
data 8 (REF8).
・[EDIT]: Set the open correction data number at port extension tip with thenumerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the open correction data number at port extension tip withthe knob or cursor keys.

The currently set open correction data number at port extension tip is displayed in the menu.
When this function is turned off, the open correction data number at port extension tip
indication becomes “OFF”.
■ [PORT EXT]－[SHORT_PEXT CORR]: Set short correction at port extension tip.
This sets the short correction function at port extension tip. It can be set when themeasurement mode is IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[ON/OFF]: Enable or disable the short correction at port extension tip.

・[MEASURE]: Start correction data measurement (when measurement mode is
IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T only).

・[COPY TO REF8] : Copy the short correction data at port extension tip to reference
data 8 (REF8).
・[EDIT]: Set the short correction data number at port extension tip with thenumerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the short correction data number at port extension tip withthe knob or cursor keys.

The currently set short correction data number at port extension tip is displayed in the menu.
When this function is turned off, the short correction data number at port extension tip
indication becomes “OFF”.
■ [PORT EXT]－[LOAD_PEXT CORR]： Set load correction at port extension tip.
This sets the load correction function at port extension tip. It can be set when themeasurement mode is IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T.
3-94

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [PORT EXT]－[LOAD_PEXT CORR]－[FUNCTION]: Enable or disable load correction function at port extension tip.
Enable or disable the load correction function at port extension tip.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[ON/OFF]: Enable or disable load correction at port extension tip.

・[MEASURE]: Start correction data measurement (when measurement mode is
IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T only).

・[COPY TO REF8] : Copy the load correction data at port extension tip to reference
data 8 (REF8).
: Set the load correction data number at port extension tip with the・[EDIT]numerical input palette.
: Modify the load correction data number at port extension tip with

・[MODIFY]

the knob or cursor keys.
The currently set load correction data number at port extension tip is displayed in the menu.
When load correction at port extension tip is turned off, the data number indication becomes“OFF”.
When load correction at port extension tip is enabled, this instrument will operate with open
correction and short correction at port extension tip both forcibly enabled internally even if
those functions were set to off (disabled).
■ [PORT EXT]－[LOAD_PEXT CORR]－[LOAD STD FMT]
: Set the load standard value format at port extension tip.
This specifies the format for when the load standard values at port extension tip are input.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・Cs-D: Specify with the series capacitance and dissipation factor.

・Cp-D: Specify with the parallel capacitance and dissipation factor.

・Rp-Cp: Specify with the parallel resistance and parallel capacitance.

・Rs-Ls: Specify with the series resistance and series inductance.

・Rs-X: Specify with the resistance (series resistance) and reactance.

・Z-θ: Specify with the impedance and phase.

■ [PORT EXT]－[LOAD_PEXT CORR]－[LOAD STD VALUE]:: Set the load standard values at port extension tip.
This sets the load standard values at port extension tip.
When the menu is tapped, the [[PORT EXTENSION LOAD STANDARD VALUE]] dialog box
appears. Set the frequency and load standard values at port extension tip. Up to 30 sets ofload standard values (30 frequencies) at port extension tip can be set.

3-95

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [PORT EXT]－[LOAD_PEXT CORR]－[LOAD STD VALUE]－[[PORT EXTENTION LOAD STANDARD VALUE]]: Set the load standard values at port
extension tip.
Set the frequency and load standard values at port extension tip. Up to 30 sets of load
standard values (30 frequencies) can be set.
When the parameter is selected and the knob is turned clockwise, the setting item changes in
the order of No. 1 Frequency → No. 1 Standard Value (Y1) → No. 1 Standard Value (Y2) →No. 2 Frequency → No. 2 Standard Value (Y1) → No. 2 Standard Value (Y2) → ...
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[DELETE LINE]: Delete the line.

・[SORT]: Sort the displayed information in frequency ascending order.

・[EDIT]: Set the load standard values with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the load standard values with the knob or cursor keys.

The setting range is 10 µHz to 36 MHz and the setting resolution is 10 µHz for the frequency.
The setting range is –1.0 T to +1.0 T and the setting resolution is 6 digits or 1 a (10–18),
whichever is larger, for the port extended end load standard values.
■ [SLOPE COMP]: Set the slope compensation function.
This function is used when performing such as electrochemical impedance measurement. It
can be set when the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T. Usually,
this function should be turned off when using this instrument. For details, refer to “1.8.7
Slope Compensation Function” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・OFF: Turn the slope compensation function off.

・ON

: Turn the slope compensation function on.

■ [EQUALIZING]： Set equalizing.
This sets the equalizing function to ON or OFF. It can be set when the measurement mode is
G−PH.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[ON/OFF]: Enable or disable the equalizing function.

・[COPY TO REF8] : Copy the equalizing data to reference data 8 (REF8).
・[EDIT]: Set the equalizing data number with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the equalizing data number with the knob or cursor keys.

3-96

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference
The currently set equalizing data number is displayed in the menu. When the equalizing
function is turned off, the equalizing data number indication becomes “OFF”.
For details on equalizing, refer to “1.8.8 Equalizing” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
■ [CALIBRATION]: Execute self-calibration.
This executes self-calibration. It can be set when the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT
and G−PH.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・ [EXEC]: Start self-calibration.

When self-calibration is started, the cable connection confirmation dialog box appears.
Confirm the cable connection and then tap the [OK] button in the confirmation dialog box tostart self-calibration. The following dialog box is displayed to indicate the progress during
self-calibration. This dialog box closes automatically once the process completes normally.

For details on self-calibration, refer to “1.8.1 Self-Calibration” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).

3-97

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.12 Calculate Menu

■ [EQUIV CKT FITTING]: Estimate the equivalent circuit.
This can be set when the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T. For
details on equivalent circuit estimation, refer to “1.11 Equivalent Circuit Estimation” inInstruction Manual (Advanced).
■ [EQUIV CKT FITTING]－[CKT TYPE]: Select the equivalent circuit.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・CKT1 : Select the equivalent circuit 1.
・CKT2 : Select the equivalent circuit 2.
・CKT3 : Select the equivalent circuit 3.
・CKT4 : Select the equivalent circuit 4.
・CKT5 : Select the equivalent circuit 5.
・CKT6 : Select the equivalent circuit 6.

3-98

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [EQUIV CKT FITTING]－[(PRMTR1)]: Select element value 1■ [EQUIV CKT FITTING]－[(PRMTR2)]: Select element value 2■ [EQUIV CKT FITTING]－[(PRMTR3)]: Select element value 3■ [EQUIV CKT FITTING]－[(PRMTR4)]: Select element value 4○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the constant value with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the constant value with the knob or cursor keys.
The L, C, and R based on the currently set equivalent circuit type and the parameter values are
displayed in the menu. When the equivalent circuit type is 1 to 4 or 6, [(PRMTR4)] is blank.
The following table shows the correspondence between the equivalent circuit type and the
PRMTR 1 to 4 and unit.
Equivalent circuit type
CKT1 to CKT4
CKT5
CKT6

PRMTR1L [H]
C0 [F]
R0 [Ω]PRMTR2
C [F]
L [H]
C [F]

PRMTR3R [Ω]C1 [F]
R1 [Ω]PRMTR4–R [Ω]–■ [EQUIV CKT FITTING]－[FIT]: Execute equivalent circuit estimation and save the results.
○ Setting procedure<Text settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>, <Execution operations(immediate execution)>○ Functions of function keys
・[FIT]: Execute equivalent circuit estimation.

・[SAVE]: Save the estimation results to a USB memory device.

For details on file format, refer to “2.4 Equivalent Circuit File Format” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
■ [PZT]: Calculate the piezoelectric constants.
This extracts the characteristic frequency from frequency - impedance characteristic of the
DUT (piezoelectric ceramics) and then calculates the piezoelectric constants, etc. It can be set
when the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T.
For details, refer to “1.12 Calculating Piezoelectric Constant” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
■ [PZT]－[PZT PRMTR]: Estimate the piezoelectric equivalent circuit.
Estimate the equivalent circuit of the DUT (piezoelectric ceramics) from the frequency sweep
results.

■ [PZT]－[PZT PRMTR]－[C0]: Set the piezoelectric equivalent circuit element (C0).
■ [PZT]－[PZT PRMTR]－[L]: Set the piezoelectric equivalent circuit element (L).

3-99

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference■ [PZT]－[PZT PRMTR]－[C]: Set the piezoelectric equivalent circuit element (C).
■ [PZT]－[PZT PRMTR]－[R]: Set the piezoelectric equivalent circuit element (R).
Set these when changing the equivalent circuit element manually.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the equivalent circuit elements with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the equivalent circuit elements with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [PZT]－[PZT PRMTR]－[FIT]: Execute piezoelectric equivalent circuit estimation.
○ Setting procedure＜Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)＞，＜Numerical settings＞，＜Execution
operations (immediate execution)＞○ Functions of function keys
・[FIT NORMAL]: Execute equivalent circuit estimation using the normal fitting
algorithm.
: Execute equivalent circuit estimation using the fine fitting・[FIT FINE]

algorithm.
・[RESN FREQ DISP] : Display the characteristic frequency.
[FIT NORMAL] has an inferior fit accuracy but is capable of a fit with a certain degree of
accuracy for measurement results with a lot of noise and distortion. Conversely, [FIT FINE] iscapable of a high-accuracy fit depending on the data, but a fit may not be possible and theresults may vary when the data is not ideal such as when there is a lot of noise. Select themost appropriate fit algorithm depending on the condition of the measurement data.
■ [PZT]－[PZT PRMTR]－[C0 MODE]: Select the C0 estimation method with the piezoelectric equivalentcircuit.
This selects the method (algorithm) to calculate the C0 of the piezoelectric equivalent circuit.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・RESNf: Estimate the C0 from the resonant frequency.

・fmax: Estimate the C0 from the susceptance when the maximum frequency.

・Gmax: Estimate the C0 from the maximum conductance.

・Bavg: Estimate the C0 from the susceptance average.

3-100

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference
For ideal measurement data, the result will be the same no matter which method you select.
However, the results obtained by the above four algorithms will differ for actual measurement
data containing noise, measurement errors, and other problems. Select the C0 estimation modein reference to the equivalent circuit fit results. Usually, “RESNf” should be used.
■ [PZT]－[PZT PRMTR]－[FREQ RESOLN]: Set frequency resolution for impedance characteristic simulation.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[SWEEP SETTING]: It will set the same value as the sweep resolution setting value.

・[EDIT]: Set the frequency resolution with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the frequency resolution with the knob or cursor keys.

The impedance characteristic is calculated from the equivalent circuit estimation results andthen displayed in a graph. The impedance characteristic is calculated with a number of
frequency points of the value set here + 1 in the frequency resolution of this time and thendisplayed on the graph.
■ [PZT]－[PZT CONST]: Calculate the piezoelectric constants.
■ [PZT]－[PZT CONST]－[[PZT CONSTANT]]: Display the piezoelectric constant calculation dialog box.
This displays a dialog box to enter information such as the DUT piezoelectric ceramic shapeand vibration mode to calculate various piezoelectric constants.
■ [REL PERMT]: Set parameters for relative permittivity measurement.
This sets the shape information of the DUT for displaying the relative permittivity of the
DUT. It can be set when the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T.
When relative permittivity related (εS, εS', εS'', or Dε) measurement is selected in [Graph]－[DISPLAY MODE Y] or [Measure]－[PRMTRn], the relative permittivity will be calculatedusing the parameters that you set here.
■ [REL PERMT]－[ELECTRODE AREA]: Set the electrode surface area.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the electrode surface area (unit: mm2) with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the electrode surface area (unit: mm2) with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [REL PERMT]－[ELECTRODE DISTANCE]： Set the distance between electrodes.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>
3-101

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the distance between electrodes (unit: mm) with the numerical input
palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the distance between electrodes (unit: mm) with the knob or
cursor keys.
■ [REL PERMB]: Set parameters for relative permeability measurement.
This sets the shape information of the DUT for displaying the relative permeability of the
DUT. It can be set when the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T.
When relative permeability related (μS, μS', μS'', or Dμ) measurement is selected in [Graph]－[DISPLAY MODE Y] or [Measure]－[PRMTRn], the relative permeability will be calculatedusing the parameters that you set here.
■ [REL PERMB]－[CORE AREA]: Set the core cross-sectional area.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the core cross-sectional area (unit: mm2) with the numerical input
palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the core cross-sectional area (unit: mm2) with the knob or cursor
keys.
■ [REL PERMB]－[MAG PATH LENGTH]: Set the magnetic path length.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the magnetic path length (unit: mm) with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the magnetic path length (unit: mm) with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [REL PERMB]－[COIL TURNS]: Set the number of coil turns.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the number of coil turns with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the number of coil turns with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [REL PERMB]－[WIRE DIAMETER]: Set the winding wire diameter.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the coil winding wire diameter (unit: mm) with the numerical input
3-102

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference
palette.
・[MODIFY] : Modify the coil winding wire diameter (unit: mm) with the knob or cursor
keys.
■ [REL PERMB]－[ONE TURN LENGTH]: Set the length of one turn of the coil.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the length (unit: mm) of one turn of the coil with the numerical input
palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the length (unit: mm) of one turn of the coil with the knob or
cursor keys.
■ [REL PERMB]－[WIRE RESISTIVITY]： Set the winding wire resistivity.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[Ag 1.59×10-8] : Set the winding wire resistivity to the resistivity of silver (1.59 ×
10-8 Ωm).
・[Cu 1.68×10 ] : Set the winding wire resistivity to the resistivity of copper (1.68 ×-8

10-8 Ωm).
・[Al 2.82×10-8]: Set the winding wire resistivity to the resistivity of aluminum (2.82 ×
10-8 Ωm).

・[EDIT]: Set the resistivity (unit: Ωm) with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY]: Modify the resistivity (unit: Ωm) with the knob or cursor keys.

3-103

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.13 Comparator Menu

This can be set when the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T. Refer to“1.15 Comparator” in Instruction Manual (Advanced) for details on the comparator and refer to“1.16 Handler Interface” in Instruction Manual (Advanced) for details on the handler interface.
■ [BIN]: Set BIN sorting / LIMIT comparison.
This sets the BIN sorting or LIMIT comparison performed in spot measurement.
■ [BIN]－[FUNCTION]: Set the sorting function to ON or OFF.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・OFF: Disable BIN sorting / LIMIT comparison.

・ON: Enable BIN sorting / LIMIT comparison.

■ [BIN]－[DEVIATION TYPE]: Set the deviation mode.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・ABS: Compare using upper and lower limit values.
3-104

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference
・DEV: Compare using upper and lower limit values in respect to the reference values.

・DEV%: Compare using upper and lower limit values (%) in respect to thereference values.

■ [BIN]－[PRI REF]: Set the primary parameter reference value.
■ [BIN]－[SEC REF]: Set the secondary parameter reference value.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the reference values with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the reference values with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [BIN]－[BIN SET]: Set the upper and lower limit values.
This displays a dialog box to set the upper and lower limit values for sorting.
■ [ZONE]: Set zone comparison.
This sets the zone comparison performed in sweep measurement.
■ [ZONE]－[FUNCTION]: Set the comparison function to ON or OFF.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・OFF: Disable zone comparison.

・ON: Enable zone comparison.

■ [ZONE]－[DEVIATION TYPE]： Set the deviation mode.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・IMMED: Directly specify the comparison range.

・REF(DEV%): Compare using upper and lower limit deviation values (%) in respect tothe reference values (REF1 to REF8).
・REF(DEV) : Compare using upper and lower deviation limit values in respect to thereference data (REF1 to REF8).
■ [ZONE]－[DEVIATION SET]: Set the reference and deviation.
■ [ZONE]－[DEVIATION SET]－[REF TRACE]: Set the reference data trace.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the reference data trace number with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the reference data trace number with the knob or cursor keys.

3-105

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen ReferenceThis specifies the data trace number (1 to 8) to be the reference. The numbers correspond to
REF1 to REF8.
■ [ZONE]－[DEVIATION SET]－[Y1 HI]: Set the Y1 upper limit.
■ [ZONE]－[DEVIATION SET]－[Y1 LO]: Set the Y1 lower limit.
■ [ZONE]－[DEVIATION SET]－[Y2 HI]: Set the Y2 upper limit.
■ [ZONE]－[DEVIATION SET]－[Y2 LO]: Set the Y2 lower limit.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[NA]: Set as not applicable for comparison.

・[EDIT]: Set the comparison values with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the comparison values with the knob or cursor keys.
■ [ZONE]－[IMMED SET]: Set the upper and lower limit values.
This displays a dialog box to set the upper and lower limit values for comparison.
■ [ACTION]: Set the action for when comparison ends.
■ [ACTION]－[BEEP]: Set the beep.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・OFF: Do not generate a beep.

・ON: Generate a beep depending on whether or not a pass or fail.

Even if [ACTION]－[BEEP] is set to ON, a beep will not be generated if [Other]－[BEEP] is set
to OFF.

3-106

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.14 Other Menu

■ [BEEP]: Turn the beep on/off.
This sets the beep (internal buzzer) to ON or OFF.
○ Setting procedure<List operations (immediate settings)>
・ON: Enable the beep.

・OFF: Disable the beep.

■ [DATE/TIME]: Set the date and time.
This sets the internal calendar and clock.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[MODIFY] : Modify the date and time with the knob or cursor keys.
The date is displayed in the yyyy/mm/dd format, and time in the hh:mm:ss format. The timeis in the 24-hour format.
The setting range is 1970 to 2099 for year, 01 to 12 for month, 01 to 31 for day, 00 to 23 for hour,
00 to 59 for minute, and 00 to 59 for second, and the setting resolution is 1 for all of them.
■ [RESET]: Reset the settings.
This resets the settings of this instrument.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[RESET]: Execute a reset.

A confirmation message appears. Tapping the [OK] button resets the settings.
3-107

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference
For details on the settings that are reset, refer to “3.6 Initial Settings”.
■ [AUX PORT STATUS]: Display the AUX connector status.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>○ Functions of function keys
・[STATUS] : Display the AUX connector status.
■ [SYSTEM]: Display this instrument information.
This displays the model name and other information of this instrument in a menu. The
information is display only. It cannot be changed. The following information is displayed.
・MODEL: ZA57630

・VERSION: Firmware version

・SERIAL No.

: Serial number

・CAL DATE: Date instrument was last calibrated

・COPYRIGHT : Copyright information○ Functions of function keys
・[FIRMWARE UPDATE] : Update the firmware.
・[TIME ZONE]: Set the time zone.

・[LOG OUTPUT]: Save the log file to a USB memory device.

・[INITIALIZE]: Restore this instrument to the factory default settings.

For details on the factory default state, refer to “3.6 Initial Settings”.
■ [TOUCH PANEL ADJ]: Adjust the touch panel position.
This performs position adjustment of the LCD touch panel of this instrument.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (requiring confirmation)>○ Functions of function keys
・[EXEC]: Start touch panel position adjustment.

Tapping the function key displays a confirmation message. Tapping the [OK] button displays
the touch panel position adjustment screen and starts adjustment.
For details on touch panel adjustment, refer to “1.20.3 Adjusting Touch Panel” in Instruction
Manual (Advanced).
■ [BRIGHTNESS]: Adjust the LCD brightness.
This adjusts the brightness of the LCD backlight of this instrument.
○ Setting procedure<Numerical settings (requiring confirmation)>, <Numerical settings>○ Functions of function keys
・[EDIT]: Set the brightness with the numerical input palette.

・[MODIFY] : Modify the brightness with the knob or cursor keys.
3-108

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference
The setting range is 0 % to 100 % and the setting resolution is 1 %. The higher the value, thehigher the brightness. Even if this is set to 0, the screen will not completely turn off.

3-109

ZA 57630

3.5 Setting Screen Reference

3.5.15 Setup Menu
This menu is displayed by pressing the SETUP key on the front panel or tapping the[SETUP] button on the screen.
This shortcut menu allows you to easily set the items for which settings are frequently
changed on this instrument.

■ [DISPLAY MODE Y]: Set the Y-axis formats.
This sets the format (type) of the Y1-axis and Y2-axis of graphs. The setting is the same as“■ DISPLAY MODE Y” in “3.5.5 Graph Menu”.
■ [SWEEP ITEM]: Set the sweep parameter.
This selects the parameter to sweep. The parameter set here becomes the X-axis of the graph.
The setting is the same as “■ SWEEP ITEM” in “3.5.4 Sweep Menu”.
■ [SWEEP UPPER]: Set the sweep upper limit.
The setting is the same as [SWEEP UPPER] in “3.5.4 Sweep Menu”.
■ [SWEEP LOWER]: Set the sweep lower limit.
The setting is the same as [SWEEP LOWER] in “3.5.4 Sweep Menu”.
■ [SETTING VIEW]: Display a list of the major current settings of this instrument.
○ Setting procedure<Execution operations (immediate execution)>[Trace] – [CONDITION VIEW] displays a list of the settings used when the data trace
indicated by the active marker was measured, whereas [SETTING VIEW] displays a list of thecurrent measurement conditions of this instrument. Please be careful because they may bothdiffer.

3-110

ZA 57630

3.6 Initial Settings

3.6 Initial Settings
The settings of this instrument will be the initial settings in the following cases.
・ At the time of shipment from the factory
All the settings are the initial settings. The values in the setting memory are all thesame as the initial values.
・ When the reset command is executed and when the measurement mode is changed
Everything except the setting memory, measurement data, and interface settings is
initialized.
Panel Operation: [Other]－[RESET]
Remote control command: *RST command・ If there is an error with the resume memory where the last settings are stored when the
power is turned on
For details on which settings will be reset to the initial settings, refer to “Table 3-4 Initial
Settings”. Whether each parameter is a resume target, measurement data save target, andsequence target are also displayed. The “Y” and “N” in the table below have the following
meaning.
Y: Setting is initialized
N: Setting is not initialized

Ssave asmeasurement data

Sequence＜OSC＞
FREQUECNCYAMPLITUDE UNITAMPLITUDE
AMPLITUDE LIMITALC
TOLELANCERETRY TIMESCORR FACTOR
DC BIAS
DC BIASHV BIASOUTPUT CONN
POWER AMP GAIN

ResumeSetting item
＜Mode＞(MODE)

Reset

Table 3-4 Initial Settings (1/12)

IMPD−EXT | IMPD−3T |IMPD−2T | G−PH

IMPD−EXT

N

Y

N

N

10 µ to 36 MHz
V|A
0 to 999 GVrms
1 aVrms to 999 GVrms
ON|OFF
1 to 100 %1 to 100
1 to 100 %1 kHz
V
1 Vrms3 Vrms
OFF
10 %
10
100 %

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N

Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

−999 GV to +999 GV
OFF|ONFRONT | REAR
−1.00E−12 to +1.00E+12

0V
OFF
FRONT
+1.00E+00

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
N
N

Y
N
N
Y

Parameter range

3-111

Initial value

ZA 57630

3.6 Initial Settings

MEASURE TIMESTART DELAY
MEASURE DELAY
TRIG SOURCEREPEAT

Sequence

G−PH

Ssave asmeasurement data

ON/OFF MODE
FREQ CHNG MODE
10MHz REF IN
10MHz REF OUT＜Measure＞
PRMTR1IMPD−EXT：IMPD−3T
PRMTR6IMPD−2T

ResumeSetting item
<OSC> (Continued)
AUX PORT SET
ON/OFF SYNC

Reset

Table 3-4 Initial Settings (2/12)

0 to 15ASYNC | SYNC(AC+DC) |SYNC(AC)QUICK | SLOW | 0° SYNC
ASYNC | 0° SYNCDISABLE | ENABLE
DISABLE | ENABLE

0
ASYNC

Y
Y

Y
Y

N
N

Y
Y

QUICK
ASYNC
DISABLEDISABLE

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N

Y
Y
N
N

Z | θZ | Y | θY | R | X | G | B |CS | CP | D | QC | LS | LP | QL |RS | RP | εS | εS' | εS'' | Dε |µS | µS' | µS'' | Dµ |V1*1 | V2*1 | V*2 | I*2
FREQUENCY | STATUS | NA
dBR | R | a | b | θ | GD |FREQUENCY | V1 | V2 |STATUS | NA

Z
θZ
NA
NA
NA
NA
dBR
θ
NA
NA
NA
NA
0 sec
0 sec
0 sec
PANEL

Y

Y

N

N

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
N

Y
Y
Y
N

OFF

Y

Y

N

N

Parameter range

0 to 9990 sec
0 to 9990 sec
0 to 9990 sec
PANEL | REMOTE |HANDLER
OFF|ON

Initial value*1: When the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT*2: When the measurement mode is IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T

3-112

ZA 57630

3.6 Initial Settings

SWEEP
LOWER

FREQUENCYAMPLITUDE
DC BIASTIME

SWEEP RESOLNSLOW SWEEPTYPEIMPD−EXTIMPD−3T
IMPD−2T
G−PH
VARIATION
Z
Y
θ
dBR
R
RESONANT TRACKUPPER FREQUENCYLOWER FREQUENCYTARGET PHASETOLERANCEPOLARITYCORR FACTOR

Sequence

FREQUENCYAMPLITUDE
DC BIAS
TIME

Parameter range

Initial value

Save asmeasurement data

SWEEP
UPPER

ResumeSetting item
＜Sweep＞
SEQ SWEEPSEQ TRIGGERSWEEP ITEM

Reset

Table 3-4 Initial Settings (3/12)

OFF | 1 to 32
AUTO | STEPFREQUENCY | AMPLITUDE |DC BIAS | TIME
10 µ to 36 MHz
0 to 999 GVrms−999 G to +999 GV

OFF
AUTO
FREQUENCY
100 kHz
1 Vrms
1V

Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y

Y
N
Y

N
N
N

Y

Y

Y

Y

However, > SWEEP LOWER
10 µ to 36 MHz
0 to 999 GVrms−999 G to +999 GV

10 Hz
1 mVrms
0V

Y

Y

Y

Y

However, < SWEEP UPPER
LIN | LOG
3 to 2000
ON|OFF
Z|Y|θ

LOG
100
OFF
θ

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
N
N

Y
Y
N
N

Y

Y

N

N

Y
Y

Y
Y

N
N

N
N

110 kHz

Y

Y

N

N

0°
10°
POSITIVE
100 %

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N

dBR | R | θ
1 a to 999 GΩ
1 a to 999 GS
0.001 to 179.999°
0.001 to 999.999 dB
1 a to 999 G
ON|OFF10 µ to 36 MHz
However, > LOWER
FREQUENCY
10 µ to 36 MHz
However, < UPPERFREQUENCY−179.999 to +180.000°
0.001 to 179.999°
POSITIVE | NEGATIVE
1 to 100 %

3-113

θ
1 kΩ
1 mS
10°
10 dB
1k
OFF
90 kHzZA 57630

3.6 Initial Settings

DISPLAY TRACE

MEAS
REF1
REF2
REF3
REF4
REF5
REF6
REF7
REF8

Sequence

G−PH

Save asmeasurement data

IMPD−EXTIMPD−3T
IMPD−2T

Parameter range

ResumeSetting item
＜Graph＞
TITLE SETDISPLAY MODE X
IMPD−EXTIMPD−3T
IMPD−2TG−PH
DISPLAY MODE Y

ResetTable 3-4 Initial Settings (4/12)

Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y

Y
N
Y

N
N
N

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

Initial value

Max. 63 characters
LOG | LINSWEEP | R | G
SWEEP | R | G(Blank)
LOG
SWEEP
SWEEP

SWEEP | θ | a
Y1 LOG | Y LIN
Y2 LOG | Y2 LIN
Z−θZ | Y−θY | R−X | G−B |CS−RS | CS−D | CS−QC |CP−RP | CP−D | CS−QC |LS−RS | LS−QL | LP−RP |LP−QL |εS−D | εS'−εS'' | µS−D | µS'−µS'' |V1−V2*1 | V−I*2 |FREQUENCY−θZ |X | −X | B
dBR−θ | R−θ | a−b |dBR−GD | R−GD | V1−V2 |FREQUENCY−θ |R | dBR | b
ON|OFF
ON|OFF
ON|OFF
ON|OFF
ON|OFF
ON|OFF
ON|OFF
ON|OFF
ON|OFFSWEEP
Y1 LINY2 LIN
Z−θZ

dBR−θ

ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

*1: When the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT*2: When the measurement mode is IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T

3-114

ZA 57630

3.6 Initial Settings

0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF

REF4 Y1
REF4 Y2
REF5 Y1
REF5 Y2
REF6 Y1

0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF

REF6 Y2
REF7 Y1
REF7 Y2
REF8 Y1
REF8 Y2

0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF

3-115

Sequence

REF2 Y1
REF2 Y2
REF3 Y1
REF3 Y2

PHASE RANGE

Save asmeasurement data

MEAS Y1
MEAS Y2
REF1 Y1
REF1 Y2

AUTO | AUTO−R | FIX−1.0 T to +1.0 T−1.0 T to +1.0 T−1.0 T to +1.0 T−1.0 T to +1.0 T−1.0 T to +1.0 T−1.0 T to +1.0 T
SINGLE | SPLIT
OFF | X | X−Y1 | X−Y2 |X−Y1−Y2SOLID LINE | BROKEN
LINE±180° | 0 to 360° |−360 to 0° | UNWRAP
2 to 200
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF
0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF

GRID LINE STYLE

APERTURE
PLOT COLOR

Parameter range

ResumeSetting item
<Graph> (Continued)
SCALE
SCALE
X MAX
RANGE
X MIN
Y1 MAXY1 MINY2 MAXY2 MIN
STYLE
GRID

Reset

Table 3-4 Initial Settings (5/12)

AUTO
100.0 k10.0
100.0 k1.0
+180.0–180.0SINGLE
X−Y1−Y2

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

BROKEN
LINE± 180°

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

10
0xA2142F
0x0072BD
0xD95319
0x4DBEE
E
0xEE631E
0x54E4FF
0xFF7724
0x5DFFFF
0xFF8F2B
0x66FFFF
0xFFAC34
0x70FFFF
0xFFCE3
E
0x7CFFFF
0xFFF74B
0x88FFFF
0xFFFF5A
0x96FFFF

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

Initial value

ZA 57630

3.6 Initial Settings

MARKER2：
MARKER8＜Trace＞
MEAS COPY
REF TRACEAUTO STORE
DELETE REF

TRACE
SEQ
POSITION

Sequence

MARKER1

X
Y1
Y2
⊿X
⊿Y1
⊿Y2
MODE
TRACE
SEQ
POSITION
MODE

Ssave asmeasurement data

SEARCH VALUE

ResumeSetting item
＜Marker＞
ACTIVE
AUTO SEARCH

Reset

Table 3-4 Initial Settings (6/12)

1 to 8OFF |X MAX | X MIN |X PEAK | X BOTTOM |Y1 MAX | Y1 MIN |Y1 PEAK | Y1 BOTTOM |Y2 MAX | Y2 MIN |Y2 PEAK | Y2 BOTTOM |X | Y1 | Y2 |⊿X |⊿Y1 |⊿Y2 |BW1 | BW2 | BW3−1.0 T to +1.0 T−1.0 T to +1.0 T−1.0 T to +1.0 T−1.0 T to +1.0 T−1.0 T to +1.0 T−1.0 T to +1.0 T
OFF | NORMAL
MEAS | REF1 to REF8
0 to 32−1.0 T to +1.0 T
OFF | NORMAL | ⊿|⊿TRKG
MEAS | REF1 to REF8
0 to 32−1.0 T to +1.0 T

1
OFF

Y
Y

Y
Y

N
N

N
N

+1.0
+1.0
+1.0
+1.0
+1.0
+1.0
OFF
MEAS
0
+1.0
OFF

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

MEAS
0
+1.0

Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y

N
N
N

N
N
N

1 to 8
OFF | 1 to 8
1 to 8

1
OFF
1

Y
Y
N

Y
Y
N

N
N
N

N
N
N

Parameter range

3-116

Initial value

ZA 57630

3.6 Initial Settings

IMPD−2T
OVER LEVEL PORT1OVER LEVEL PORT1OVER ACT BEEPOVER ACT MEASWTG FACTOR
PORT1
PORT2
＜Storage＞
SCRN COPY FILENUMBER000 to 999

3-117

Sequence

IMPD−3T

AUTO | 7 Vrms | 5 Vrms |2 Vrms | 1 Vrms |500 mVrms | 200 mVrms |100 mVrms | 50 mVrms |20 mVrms | 10 mVrms
AUTO | 7 Vrms | 5 Vrms |2 Vrms | 1 Vrms |500 mVrms | 200 mVrms |100 mVrms | 50 mVrms |20 mVrms | 10 mVrms
AUTO | 1 MΩ | 100 kΩ |10 kΩ | 1 kΩ | 100 Ω | 10 Ω
AUTO | 1 kΩ | 100 Ω | 10 Ω |1Ω
0 to 7 Vrms
0 to 7 Vrms
ON|OFF
CONT | STOP
−999.999E+09 to+999.999E+09−999.999E+09 to+999.999E+09

Save asmeasurement data

PORT2Parameter range

ResumeSetting item
＜Range＞
RANGE
IMPD−EXT
PORT1
G−PH

Reset

Table 3-4 Initial Settings (7/12)

AUTO
AUTO

Y
Y

Y
Y

Y
N

Y
Y

AUTO

Y

Y

N

Y

AUTO

Y

Y

N

Y

7 Vrms7 Vrms
ON
CONT
1.0

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N

Y
Y
N
N
Y

1.0

Y

Y

N

Y

000

N

Y

N

N

Initial value

ZA 57630

3.6 Initial Settings

HANDLER
TRIG POLARITYSWEEP DIRPOSITIVE | NEGATIVE
UP | DOWN | SPOT

Sequence

LAN

FLOW CONTROLTERMINATOR
DHCP
IP ADDRESSGATEWAYSUBNET MASKDNSPORT NUMBER
MAC ADDRESSUSB | GPIB | RS−232 |LAN
0 to 304800 | 9600 | 19200 |
38400 |57600 | 115200 |
230400NONE|SOFT|HARD
CR+LF | LF
ENABLE | DISABLE
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Save asmeasurement data

GPIB ADDRESSRSBAUD RATE−232

Parameter range

ResumeSetting item
＜Remote＞
SELECT

Reset

Table 3-4 Initial Settings (8/12)

USB

N

Y

N

N

2
9600

N
N

Y
Y

N
N

N
N

NONE
CR+LF
ENABLE
192.16.0.2
0.0.0.0
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0502500−14−CE−XX−XX−XX

N
N
N*1
N*1
N*1
N*1
N*1
−

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
−
−

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
−
−

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
−
−

POSITIVE
SPOT

N
Y

Y
Y

N
N

N
N

Initial value*1: Initialized by LAN RESET

3-118

ZA 57630

3.6 Initial Settings

3-119

Sequence

LOAD STD VALUESLOPE COMPEQUALIZING

OFF | 1 to 32
OFF | 1 to 32
OFF | 1 to 32
CS−D | CP−D | RP−CP |RS−LS | RS−X | Z−θ−1.0 T to +1.0 T
ON|OFF1.00 to 999 Ω
0.000 to 999.999 m
OFF | 1 to 32
OFF | 1 to 32
OFF | 1 to 32
CS−D | CP−D | RP−CP |RS−LS | RS−X | Z−θ−1.0 T to +1.0 T
ON|OFF
OFF | 1 to 32

Save asmeasurement data

LOAD STD VALUEPORT EXTENSIONZ0ELEC LENGTH
OPEN_PEXT CORR
SHORT_PEXT CORR
LOAD_PEXT CORR
LOAD STD FMTParameter range

ResumeSetting item
＜Calibration＞
OPEN CORR
SHORT CORR
LOAD CORR
LOAD STD FMT

ResetTable 3-4 Initial Settings (9/12)

OFF
OFF
OFF
CS−D

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N

Y
Y
Y
Y

1.0
OFF
50.0 Ω
0.000 m
OFF
OFF
OFF
Cs-D

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

1.0
OFF
OFF

Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y

N
N
N

Y
Y
Y

Initial value

ZA 57630

3.6 Initial Settings

Save asmeasurement data

Sequencelatd
RELATIVEPERMITTIVITYPOISSON'S RATIODENSITY
REL PERMTELECTRODE AREA
ELECTRODEDISTANCE
REL PERMB
CORE AREAMAG PATH LENGTH
COIL TURNSWIRE DIAMETERONE TURN LENGTHWIRE RESISTIVITY

ResumeSetting item
＜Calculate＞
EQUIV CKT FITTINGCKT TYPE(PRMTR1)(PRMTR2)(PRMTR3)(PRMTR4)PZT PARAMETER
C0L
CR
C0 MODE
FREQ RESOLNPZT CONSTANTPZT CONSTANT

Reset

Table 3-4 Initial Settings (10/12)

CKT1 to CKT6
0 to 999.999 G
0 to 999.999 G
0 to 999.999 G
0 to 999.999 G

CKT1
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

0 to 999.999 GF
0 to 999.999 GH
0 to 999.999 GF
0 to 999.999 GΩ
RESNf | fmax | Gmax | Bavg
3 to 2000

1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
RESNf
100

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N

Disk−Radial |Disk−Thickness extensional |Rod−Axial |Plate−Length extensional |Plate−Thickness shear
0 to 999.999 mm
0 to 999.999 mm
0 to 999.999 mm
0 to 999.999 mm
0 to 10000

Disk−Radial

Y

Y

N

N

10.0 mm10.0 mm10.0 mm10.0 mm
1000

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

0.2 to 0.5
0 to 100 kg/m3

0.3
8.0 kg/m3

Y
Y

Y
Y

N
N

N
N

0 to 1.0E+06 mm2
0 to 1000 mm

100 mm2
1.0 mm

Y
Y

Y
Y

N
N

N
N

0 to 1.0E+06 mm2
0 to 1000 mm
1 to 10000
0 to 100 mm
0 to 1000 mm
0 to 1.00 Ωm

100 mm2
100.0 mm100
0.2 mm
100 mm16.80 nΩ
m

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N

Parameter range

3-120

Initial value

ZA 57630

3.6 Initial Settings

Sequence

BRIGHTNESSTIME ZONE

Save asmeasurement data

DEVIATION SET
REF TRACE
Y1 HI
Y1 LO
Y2 HI
Y2 LO
IMMED SETSWEEPY1 HI|LO, Y2 HI|LO
ACTION BEEP
＜Other＞
BEEP
DATE/TIME YEAR

ResumeSetting item
＜Comparator＞
BIN
DEVIATION TYPE
PRI REFSEC REFBIN SETZONEDEVIATION TYPE

Reset

Table 3-4 Initial Settings (11/12)

ON|OFFABS | DEV | DEV%
−999.999 G to +999.999 G−999.999 G to +999.999 G−999.999 G to +999.999 G
ON|OFFIMMED | REF(DEV) |REF(DEV%)

OFF
ABS
1.0
1.0
0.0
OFF
REF(DEV)

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N
N

1 to 8
NA | −999.999 G to +999.999 G
NA | −999.999 G to +999.999 G
NA | −999.999 G to +999.999 G
NA | −999.999 G to +999.999 G

1
NA
NA
NA
NA

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

−999.999 G to +999.999 G
NA | −999.999 G to +999.999 G
ON|OFF

1.0
NA
ON

Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y

N
N
N

N
N
N

ON|OFF
1998 to 2099

ON
(At time of
shipment)(At time of
shipment)(At time of
shipment)(At time of
shipment)(At time of
shipment)(At time of
shipment)
50(At time of
shipment)

Y
N

Y
Y

N
Y

N
N

N

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N
N

Y
Y

N
N

N
N

Parameter range

MONTH

1 to 12DATE

1 to 31TIME

0 to 23MINUTE

0 to 59

SEC

0 to 59
0 to 100−

3-121

Initial value

ZA 57630

3.6 Initial SettingsSWEEP ITEM

SWEEP
UPPER

SWEEP
LOWER

FREQUENCYAMPLITUDE
DC BIAS
TIME
FREQUENCYAMPLITUDE
DC BIAS
TIME

Sequence

G−PH

Save asmeasurement data

IMPD−EXTIMPD−3T
IMPD−2T

ResumeSetting item
＜SETUP＞
DISPLAY MODE

Reset

Table 3-4 Initial Settings (12/12)

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

FREQUE
NCY

Y

Y

N

N

100 kHz
1 Vrms
1V

Y

Y

Y

Y

10 Hz
1 mVrms
0V

Y

Y

Y

Y

Parameter range

Initial value

Y1 LOG | Y1 LIN
Y2 LOG | Y2 LIN
Z−θZ | Y−θY | R−X | G−B |CS−RS | CS−D | CS−QC |CP−RP | CP−D | CS−QS |LS−RS | LS−QL | LP−RP |LP−QL |εS−D | εS'−εS'' | µS−D | µS'−µS'' |V1−V2*1 | V−I*2 |FREQUENCY−θZ |X | −X | B
dBR−θ | R−θ | a−b |dBR−GD | R−GD | V1−V2 |FREQUENCY−θ |R | dBR | b
FREQUENCY | AMPLITUDE|
DC BIAS | TIME
10 µ to 36 MHz
0 to 999 GVrms−999 G to +999 GV

Y1 LOGY2 LINZ−θZ

However, > SWEEP LOWER
10 µ to 36 MHz
0 to 999 GVrms−999 G to +999 GV

dBR−θHowever, < SWEEP UPPER*1: When the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT*2: When the measurement mode is IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T

3-122

ZA 57630

4. Basic Operations

4.1 Display and Operation when Power Is Turned On ................ 4-2
4.1.1 Check before Turning On the Power ............................ 4-2
4.1.2 Turning the Power On and Off ..................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Restoration of Settings at Power On ............................ 4-3
4.1.4 Startup Screen and Operation on Startup .................... 4-4
4.2 Simple Operation for First Time Use ..................................... 4-5
4.2.1 Common Operations .................................................... 4-5
4.2.2 Measuring Impedance (Measurement Mode:
IMPD−EXT).................................................................. 4-6
4.2.3 Measuring Impedance (Measurement Mode:
IMPD−3T) .................................................................... 4-9
4.2.4 Measuring Impedance (Measurement Mode:
IMPD−2T) .................................................................. 4-11
4.2.5 Measuring Gain and Phase (Measurement
Mode: G−PH) ............................................................. 4-12
4.3 Setting Measurement Signals ............................................. 4-13
4.4 Measurement Controls ........................................................ 4-18
4.5 Setting Sweep Measurement .............................................. 4-19
4.6 Setting Spot Measurement .................................................. 4-25

4-1

ZA57630

4.1 Display and Operation when Power Is Turned On

4.1 Display and Operation when Power Is Turned On
4.1.1 Check before Turning On the Power
Before turning the power switch on, read “2.3 Grounding and Power Supply Connection” andcheck this instrument grounding and power supply voltage.

4.1.2 Turning the Power On and Off
This instrument has the three operation states listed below. The operation state is switchedby using the power switch (rear panel) and the standby switch (front panel). The operation
state is indicated by the lighting state of the standby switch.
Power-on stateThis instrument is operating and the settings can be configured
and measurement can be performed. Standby switch: Lit in green

Power-off stateThis instrument is disconnected from the power supply (notoperating). Standby switch: Not lit

Standby statePower is supplied to this instrument, but this instrument is notoperating. Standby switch: Lit in orange

The general procedures for turning the power on and off are described below.
■ Switching to the power-on state
Check that an appropriate power supply is being supplied to the power cord connected to thepower inlet and that the power switch is set to the “|” position.
Press the standby switch. The standby switch lights in green, this instrument switches to thepower-on state, all of the LED lamps on the front panel light for 2 to 3 seconds, the startup
screen is displayed on the LCD, and then this instrument becomes operable.
■ Switching to the standby state
Press the standby switch while this instrument is operating (power-on state). A shutdown
confirmation message appears on the LCD. Tap [OK] to start the shutdown process (stopprocess). All of the LED lamps on the front panel light and then this instrument switches tothe standby state and operation stops within 10 or more seconds. When this instrument
switches to the standby state, the standby switch lights in orange.
■ Switching to the power-off state
Perform one or both of the following operations while this instrument is in the standby state.
Set the power switch to the “○” position.
Disconnect the power cord from the power inlet (or disconnect the power plug fromthe power outlet).
The standby switch will not be lit in the power-off state.
In normal use, there is no need to switch to the power-off state.

4-2

ZA57630

4.1 Display and Operation when Power Is Turned On

4.1.3 Restoration of Settings at Power On
The setting state when this instrument starts differs depending on how the power last
turned off. In any case, however, the measurement signal is always off after startup.
Operation state (settings A)
Press the standby switch
Tap [OK] in the confirmation
message● Power switch: “○”● Power outage● Power switch: “○”● Power outage● Power switch: “|”● Recovered from power outage● Power switch: “|”● Recovered from power outage

Press the standby switch

Operation state (settings A)

Operation state (setting memory no. 1)

If this instrument has stopped operating because of a power outage or the power switch
being set to the “○” position, the power will be turned on automatically by the process forrecovery from a power outage or by setting the power switch to the “|” position (standby
switch operation is not necessary). However, the settings when the power is restored will not
be in the state immediately before the power interruption but will instead become thesettings in setting memory no. 1. For details on setting memory, refer to “1.17 Memory
Operations” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).

4-3

ZA57630

4.1 Display and Operation when Power Is Turned On

4.1.4 Startup Screen and Operation on Startup
When the power switch is turned on, the startup screen appears. Furthermore, all lamps arelit for the first several seconds while an operation check is performed.
During this period, the internal initial settings are configured and self-diagnosis isperformed. If an error is detected, an error message is displayed. If that happens, turn off thepower switch on the rear panel, wait at least five seconds, and then turn the power switch
back on. If the error occurs again, this instrument may be malfunctioning, so please contact
NF Corporation or its authorized agent.

Startup Screen
When this instrument starts up normally, the initial screen appears.

Initial Screen
From this point, operations such as setting and measurement are possible.

4-4

ZA57630

4.2 Simple Operation for First Time Use

4.2 Simple Operation for First Time UseThis section describes setting procedures for basic measurements.

4.2.1 Common Operations■ Reset settings.
Reset the settings of this instrument as follows.
Select [Other]－[RESET] and then tap the [RESET] function key. A confirmation message
appears on the LCD. Tap the [OK] button to reset the settings.
For details on the settings that are reset, refer to “3.6 Initial Settings”.
■ SETUP Key
Press the SETUP key on the front panel or tap the [SETUP] button to display the Setup menu.
This shortcut menu allows you to easily set the items for which settings are frequently changed.

[DISPLAY MODE Y] : Set the graph Y-axis (measurement item).
[SWEEP ITEM]: Set the sweep item.

[SWEEP UPPER]: Set the sweep upper limit.

[SWEEP LOWER]: Set the sweep lower limit.

[SETTING VIEW]: Display the major settings.

For details on changing the settings and other procedures, refer to “3.3.1 Menu Operating
Procedures”.

4-5

ZA57630

4.2 Simple Operation for First Time Use

4.2.2 Measuring Impedance (Measurement Mode: IMPD−EXT)The IMPD−EXT measurement mode requires current-voltage conversion (current detection
resistor / shunt resistor, current probe, etc.) to be performed for measurement but the
impedance characteristics of a DUT can be measured using a high voltage or high current,
which is not possible with general impedance analyzers. This is achieved by amplifying themeasurement signal of this instrument using a DUT drive amplifier. Furthermore, since ameasurement connection appropriate for the DUT is possible, impedance characteristic of a
DUT with grounding can also be measured.
■ Example impedance measurement connection of DUT using large voltage
Connect the voltage of the DUT to PORT1 and connect the voltage resulting from convertingthe current flowing to the DUT to PORT2.
ZA57630

DUT drive amplifier

OSC / HCURv
PORT1 / HPOT

0.1 v

10:1 probe
DUT
Zx

PORT2 / LCUR

Rs ii
Current detection resistor
Rs

Figure 4-1 Impedance Measurement Connection Example 1 (IMPD−EXT, Measurement of High Voltage)
The above connection allows you to obtain the value of impedance + current detection
resistance of the DUT as the measurement result. The influence of the probe and current
detection resistor can be removed by short correction and load correction. For details on shortcorrection and load correction, refer to “1.8 Error Correction” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
When the measurement signal output is amplified by a DUT drive amplifier (power amplifier), theimpedance characteristics of a DUT can be measured using a high voltage that exceeds the signal
amplitude of this instrument (maximum 3 Vrms). When taking the measurement, use, for example,
a probe for an oscilloscope or a differential probe so that the signal amplitude input to PORT1 will
be no higher than 10 Vrms. Use a current detection resistor, CT, current probe, etc. to convert thecurrent flowing to the DUT to a voltage and then measure the voltage at PORT2.
Setting the gain of the DUT drive amplifier in [OSC]－[POWER AMP GAIN] enables thesignal amplitude to apply to the DUT to be directly set on this instrument. For details, refer
to “4.3 Setting Measurement Signals”.
If the reciprocals of the conversion ratio for conversion using a probe or current detection
resistor are set in [Range]－[WTG FAC PORT1] and [WTG FAC PORT2] respectively, the value
equivalent to a DUT voltage/current will be converted and then displayed on this instrument.
For details, refer to “1.8.2 Weighting Factor” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).

4-6

ZA57630

4.2 Simple Operation for First Time Use■ Example of measurement connection of DUT with one line grounded
ZA57630

DUT drive amplifier

OSC / HCUR
PORT1 / HPOT

0.1v

i

Current probe
conversion ratio K [V/A]v
PORT2 / LCUR

Ki

10:1 probe

DUT
Zx

Figure 4-2 Impedance Measurement Connection Example 2 (IMPD−EXT, Measurement of DUT
with Grounding)
If a current probe or CT is used for current detection, the impedance of a DUT withgrounding can also be measured.

■ Example of measurement connection of high-impedance DUT (micro current)
ZA57630

DUT drive amplifier

OSC / HCUR
PORT1 / HPOTv
0.1v

10:1 probe

Current-voltage
conversion amplifierRF
PORT2 / LCUR

DUT
Zx

i

−

−RF i

+

Figure 4-3 Impedance Measurement Connection Example 3 (IMPD−EXT, Measurement ofHigh-Impedance DUT)
Using a current-voltage conversion amplifier for current detection enables the detection of a
micro current of nA order or pA order in magnitude, which is difficult to measure with ashunt resistor or current probe, so a high-impedance DUT can be measured with highsensitivity. Amplifiers such as the CA5350 Programmable Current Amplifier and SA-600 Series
Wideband Current Amplifier can be used as the current-voltage conversion amplifier. For
details on these current-voltage conversion amplifiers, contact NF Corporation or its
authorized agent.

4-7

ZA57630

4.2 Simple Operation for First Time Use
Set up this instrument and perform measurement in the following order.
1) Set the measurement mode to IMPD−EXT in the [Mode] menu.
2) Reset the settings and then connect equipment and DUT.
3) Tap [SETUP] or press the SETUP key and then change each setting item as necessary.
[DISPLAY MODE Y]: Set the graph Y-axis item.

[SWEEP ITEM]: Set the sweep item.

[SWEEP UPPER]: Set the sweep upper limit.

[SWEEP LOWER]: Set the sweep lower limit.

4) The initial settings are 1 Vrms for the measurement signal amplitude, 0 V for the DC bias,
and 1.0 for the DUT drive amplifier gain. If you wish to measure with a different signal
amplitude or use a DUT drive amplifier, tap the [OSC] menu and change the settings.
[AMPLITUDE]: Set the measurement signal amplitude.

[DC BIAS]: Set the DC bias.

[POWER AMP GAIN] : Set the DUT drive amplifier gain.
5) Set the conversion coefficient of the voltage probe, current detection resistor, current
probe, etc. Set the following items in the [Range] menu.
[WTG FAC PORT1]: Set the reciprocal of the conversion ratio of the voltage probe.

[WTG FAC PORT2]: Set the reciprocal of the current-voltage conversion ratio.

6) Press the AC/DC ON key to turn measurement signal output on.
7) Press the MEASURE DOWN key to perform down-sweep measurement and then wait forthe sweep to end. The following shows an example of when a frequency sweep was
performed.

8) Operating the knob moves a marker on the measurement data. This allows you to read themeasurement value at any frequency. You can also perform operations such as detecting
the maximum value, searching, and finding the location of an arbitrary gain value. For
more details on the operations, refer to “1.7 Marker Operations” in Instruction Manual(Advanced).
Performing open correction, short correction, and load correction enables measurement for
which the errors of the measurement system are corrected. For details on these correction
procedures, refer to “1.8 Error Correction” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).

4-8

ZA57630

4.2 Simple Operation for First Time Use

4.2.3 Measuring Impedance (Measurement Mode: IMPD−3T)
The IMPD−3T measurement mode is a mode to attach a commercially available test fixture
used for an LCR meter or impedance analyzer to this instrument and then measure theimpedance characteristics of components.
ZA57630

Test fixture for
LCR meter

HCUR / OSC
HPOT / PORT1
LPOT

DUT
Zx

LCUR / PORT2
Figure 4-4 Impedance Measurement Connection Example 4 (IMPD−3T)
You can use a test fixture with an internal connection that is 4-terminal, 4-terminal-pair, or
2-terminal. For example, there are the ZM2363 TEST FIXTURE (for lead components) andZM2394H CHIP TEST FIXTURE (for SMD). Other test fixtures are also available dependingon the purpose. For details, contact NF Corporation or its authorized agent.
Measurement in the IMPD−3T mode will be with a 3-terminal connection to the DUT evenwhen using a test fixture that is a 4-terminal or 4-terminal-pair. Therefore, measurements
will be affected by contact resistance and its variations. For low impedance measurements ofapproximately 10 Ω or less, we recommend evaluating the measurement value variations due
to contact resistance using an actual DUT before use.
Set up this instrument and perform measurement in the following order.
1) Set the measurement mode to IMPD−3T in the [Mode] menu.
2) Reset the settings and then connect the test fixture and DUT.
3) Tap [SETUP] or press the SETUP key and then change each setting item as necessary.
[DISPLAY MODE Y]: Set the graph Y-axis item.

[SWEEP ITEM]: Set the sweep item.

[SWEEP UPPER]: Set the sweep upper limit.

[SWEEP LOWER]: Set the sweep lower limit.

4) Press the AC/DC ON key to turn measurement signal output on.
5) Press the MEASURE DOWN key to perform down-sweep measurement and then wait forthe sweep to end.
6) Operating the knob moves a marker on the measurement data. This allows you to read themeasurement value at any frequency. You can also perform operations such as detecting the
maximum value, searching, and finding the location of an arbitrary gain value. For moredetails on the operations, refer to “1.7 Marker Operations” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
Performing open correction, short correction, and load correction enables measurement for
which the errors of the measurement system are corrected. For details on these correction
4-9

ZA57630

4.2 Simple Operation for First Time Useprocedures, refer to “1.8 Error Correction” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
The included 100 Ω RESISTOR can be used for checking the operation in the IMPD−3T
measurement mode.
ZA57630
HCUR / OSC
HPOT / PORT1

100 Ω RESISTOR(accessory)

LPOT
LCUR / PORT2
Figure 4-5 How to Check Operation Using 100 Ω RESISTOR (IMPD−3T)
The measurement result of impedance Z and phase θZ are normal if they are roughly in thefollowing ranges.
1 MHz or less

Z: 100 Ω±2.0 Ω, θZ: 0° ±2°

10 MHz or less

Z: 100 Ω±4.0 Ω, θZ: 0°±10°

36 MHz or less

Z: 100 Ω±25.0 Ω, θZ: 0°±20°

Measurements at frequencies above 10 MHz are for supplemental value.

4-10

ZA57630

4.2 Simple Operation for First Time Use

4.2.4 Measuring Impedance (Measurement Mode: IMPD−2T)
The IMPD−2T measurement mode is a mode to measure the impedance of a DUT connected
to PORT3 (N connector). The shielded side of the PORT3 connector is connected to theenclosure. Therefore, a DUT with grounding can be measured. Furthermore, this instrument
includes a function to correct the phase shift due to the measurement cable (port extension
function), so there is no limitation to the length of the measurement cable.
ZA57630
PORT3
DUT
Zx

Figure 4-6 Impedance Measurement Connection Example 5 (IMPD−2T)
Measurement in the IMPD−2T mode is 2-terminal measurement using an N connector, so
stable measurement even at high frequency is possible. However, measurements will beaffected by connector contact resistance and coaxial cable wire resistance and theirvariations. For low impedance measurements of approximately 10 Ω or less, we recommend
evaluating the measurement value variations due to contact resistance using an actual DUT
before use.
Set up this instrument and perform measurement in the following order.
1) Set the measurement mode to IMPD−2T in the [Mode] menu.
2) Reset the settings and then connect the DUT.
3) Tap [SETUP] or press the SETUP key and then change each setting item as necessary.
[DISPLAY MODE Y]: Set the graph Y-axis item.

[SWEEP ITEM]: Set the sweep item.

[SWEEP UPPER]: Set the sweep upper limit.

[SWEEP LOWER]: Set the sweep lower limit.

4) Press the AC/DC ON key to turn measurement signal output on.
5) Press the MEASURE DOWN key to perform down-sweep measurement and then wait forthe sweep to end.
6) Operating the knob moves a marker on the measurement data. This allows you to read themeasurement value at any frequency. You can also perform operations such as detecting the
maximum value, searching, and finding the location of an arbitrary gain value. For moredetails on the operations, refer to “1.7 Marker Operations” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
Performing open correction, short correction, and load correction enables measurement for which
the errors of the measurement system are corrected. Furthermore, the influence of the phaseshift due to the measurement cable can be corrected by the port extension function. For details
on these correction procedures, refer to “1.8 Error Correction” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
4-11

ZA57630

4.2 Simple Operation for First Time Use

4.2.5 Measuring Gain and Phase (Measurement Mode: G−PH)
The G−PH measurement mode is a mode to measure the transmission characteristics of anamplifier, filter, etc.
ZA57630

PORT2
LCUR

PORT1
HPOT

OSC
HCUR
EUT
BNC
Tee adapter

Figure 4-7 Gain and Phase Measurement Connection Example
Measure and display the gain and phase of the PORT1 signal using the PORT2 signal as thereference. The gain-phase characteristics of the EUT (equipment under test) can be obtainedby measuring with the input signal of the EUT connected to PORT2 and the output signal
connected to PORT1 as shown in the figure above.
Set up this instrument and perform measurement in the following order.
1) Set the measurement mode to G−PH in the [Mode] menu.
2) Reset the settings and then connect the EUT.
3) Tap [SETUP] or press the SETUP key and then change each setting item as necessary.
[DISPLAY MODE Y]: Set the graph Y-axis item.

[SWEEP ITEM]: Set the sweep item.

[SWEEP UPPER]: Set the sweep upper limit.

[SWEEP LOWER]: Set the sweep lower limit.

4) Press the AC/DC ON key to turn measurement signal output on.
5) Press the MEASURE DOWN key to perform down-sweep measurement and then wait forthe sweep to end.
6) Operating the knob moves a marker on the measurement data. This allows you to read themeasurement value at any frequency. You can also perform operations such as detecting
the maximum value, searching, and finding the location of an arbitrary gain value. For
more details on the operations, refer to “1.7 Marker Operations” in Instruction Manual(Advanced).
Performing equalizing enables measurement for which the errors of the measurement
system are corrected. For details on equalizing, refer to “1.8.8 Equalizing” in Instruction
Manual (Advanced).

4-12

ZA57630

4.3 Setting Measurement Signals

4.3 Setting Measurement Signals
This section describes the basic settings and operations for measurement signals.
■ Turning output on/off
Operate the OSC keys on the front panel.
Output lamps

Press the AC/DC ON key to turn both AC output and DC output on.
Press the AC/DC OFF key to turn both AC output and DC output off.
Press the AC OFF key to turn only AC output off. DC output remains on.
Output can also be turned on when measurement starts and turned off automatically whenmeasurement ends. Use this when you wish the application of a signal to the DUT to be kept tothe minimum. For details, refer to “1.4.1 Measurement Synchronous Driving” in Instruction Manual(Advanced).
■ Setting the frequency
The following describes how to set the measurement signal frequency. The frequency can be
set in the range of 10 µHz to 36 MHz with a 10 µHz resolution. This frequency setting is formeasurement (spot measurement) performed at a fixed frequency.
Tap [OSC] − [FREQUENCY].

Tap a function key at the bottom of the LCD to set the frequency setting.
[SWEEP MIN -> FREQ]＊ : Set the frequency to the sweep lower frequency limit.
[SWEEP MAX -> FREQ]＊: Set the frequency to the sweep upper frequency limit.
[MKR -> FREQ]＊: Set the frequency to the frequency of the active marker.

[CURR -> FREQ]: Set the frequency to the current measurement signal frequency.

[EDIT]: Set the frequency with the numerical input palette.

[MODIFY]: Modify the frequency setting with the knob or cursor keys.

*: Displayed when frequency sweep.
4-13

ZA57630

4.3 Setting Measurement Signals■ Setting the amplitude and DC bias unit
Select whether to set the signal amplitude (measurement signal amplitude or DC bias) as a
voltage or a current. Tap [OSC] − [AMPLITUDE UNIT] and select whether voltage (V) or
current (A). When the measurement mode is IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T, voltage or current canbe selected. When the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT and G−PH, this is limited to voltage(setting as a current is not possible).

2) Select V or A.
1) Tap AMPLITUDE
UNIT.

■ Setting the measurement signal amplitude
Set the measurement signal amplitude for measurement. This amplitude setting is formeasurement (spot measurement) performed at a fixed amplitude. Tap [OSC] −[AMPLITUDE].

Tap a function key at the bottom of the LCD to set the amplitude setting.
[SWEEP MIN -> AMPTD]＊ : Set the amplitude to the sweep lower amplitude limit.
[SWEEP MAX -> AMPTD]＊: Set the amplitude to the sweep upper amplitude limit.
[MKR -> AMPTD]＊: Set the amplitude to the amplitude of the active marker.

[CURR -> AMPTD]: Set the amplitude to the current output amplitude.

[EDIT]: Set the amplitude with the numerical input palette.

[MODIFY]: Modify the amplitude setting with the knob or cursor keys.

*: Displayed when measurement signal amplitude sweep.
○ Limits on the measurement signal amplitude setting range and DC bias setting range
When normal DC bias is used, the settings for the measurement signal amplitude (converted tothe peak value) and DC bias are limited to a total of ±5 Vpk. Please note that when the DC bias
is set to +4.5 V (or −4.5 V), the measurement signal amplitude setting range is limited to a
4-14

ZA57630

4.3 Setting Measurement Signals
maximum of 0.352 Vrms (= (5−4.5) ÷1.42 ( ≈2 ) ).

When HV bias is used, the settings for the measurement signal amplitude (converted to thepeak value) and DC bias are limited to a total of ±42 Vpk. Please note that when the DC bias is
set to +40 V (or −40 V), the measurement signal amplitude setting range is limited to a
maximum of 1.40 Vrms (= (42−40) ÷1.42 ( ≈2 ) ).

○ Setting the amplitude limit
You can set the maximum value for the measurement signal amplitude that can be output in[OSC] − [AMPLITUDE LIMIT]. In addition to preventing damage to the DUT caused by setting
an incorrect amplitude, this will ensure that an amplitude exceeding the amplitude limit set
here will also not be output during automatic level control (ALC) operation.
○ Setting the DUT drive amplifier gain
When the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT or G−PH, setting the DUT drive amplifier gain([OSC] − [POWER AMP GAIN]) enables directly setting it as the signal amplitude to apply to the
DUT. If the DUT drive amplifier gain is set to K, 0 to 3 × K Vrms will become the setting range.
The amplitude limit setting range and mutual setting restriction range of DC bias and AC
amplitude will also increase by K times (in the case of |K|<1, the range is reduced from 3 Vrms). If
a DUT drive amplifier will not be used, set to the initial value of 1.0.
■ Setting the DC bias
This is the setting of the DC bias applied to the device/equipment under test. It can be set in
the range of −5 to +5 V.
Select [OSC] − [DC BIAS] − [DC BIAS].
2) Tap DC
BIAS.

1) Tap DC
BIAS.
Tap a function key at the bottom of the LCD to set the amplitude setting.
[SWEEP MIN -> DC BIAS]＊ : Set the DC bias to the sweep lower DC bias limit.
[SWEEP MAX -> DC BIAS]＊ : Set the DC bias to the sweep upper DC bias limit.
[MKR -> DC BIAS]＊: Set the DC bias to the DC bias of the active marker.

[CURR -> DC BIAS]: Set the DC bias to the current output DC bias.

[EDIT]: Set the DC bias with the numerical input palette.

[MODIFY]: Modify the DC bias setting with the knob or cursor keys.

*: Displayed when DC bias sweep.
4-15

ZA57630

4.3 Setting Measurement Signals○ Normal DC bias and HV DC bias
HV DC bias can be used when the measurement mode is IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T. When
[OSC] − [DC BIAS] − [HV BIAS] is set to ON, HV bias is enabled. When it is set to OFF,normal DC bias is enabled.
The setting range of normal DC bias is a maximum of ±5 V, but a maximum of ±40 V can be
set for HV DC bias. A large DC bias can be applied to the DUT for measurement, but HV DC
bias has the following limitations.
・The output impedance of the measurement signal connector (HCUR) is approximately
1 kΩ for DC and 50 Ω for AC. Consequently, the bias voltage actually applied to the
DUT is significantly attenuated in the case of a DUT in which DC current flows(resistor, inductor, etc.). In the case of normal DC bias, the output impedance isapproximately 50 Ω regardless of the frequency range.
・The lower frequency limit for which measurement is possible is 1 kHz. In the case of
normal DC bias, the lower measurement frequency limit is 10 µHz.
○ Limits on the measurement signal amplitude setting range and DC bias setting range
When normal DC bias is used, the settings for the measurement signal amplitude (converted
to the peak value) and DC bias are limited to a total of ±5 Vpk. Please note that when themeasurement signal amplitude is set to 3 Vrms, the DC bias setting range is limited to a
maximum of ±0.74 V(=(5−3 ×1.42 ( ≈2 ) ).

When HV bias is used, the settings for the measurement signal amplitude (converted to thepeak value) and DC bias are limited to a total of ±42 Vpk. Please note that when themeasurement signal amplitude is set to 3 Vrms, the DC bias setting range is limited to a
maximum of ±37.74 V(=(42−3 × 1.42 ( ≈2 ) ).

○ Selecting the DC bias output connector
Normally, the DC bias is added to the measurement signal output and then output from the
OSC connector on the front panel.
When the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT and G−PH, the DC bias will be output from the
DC BIAS OUT connector on the rear panel if [OSC] − [DC BIAS] − [OUTPUT CONNECTOR] is
set to [REAR]. Please note that the DC bias will not be output from the OSC connector on thefront panel at that time. Use this setting when you wish to supply the DC bias applied to thedevice/equipment under test via a different path than the signal for measurement.
○ Setting the DUT drive amplifier gain
When the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT and G−PH, setting the DUT drive amplifier
gain ([OSC] − [POWER AMP GAIN]) enables directly setting it as the DC bias to apply to the
DUT. If the DUT drive amplifier gain is set to K, (−5 to +5) × K V will become the setting
range. The amplitude limit setting range and mutual setting restriction range of DC bias andmeasurement signal amplitude will also increase by K times (in the case of |K|<1, the range
is reduced from ±5 V). If a DUT drive amplifier will not be used, set to the initial value of 1.0.

4-16

ZA57630

4.3 Setting Measurement Signals
For details on advanced measurement signal settings other than the above, refer to“1.4 Measurement Signal Control” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).

4-17

ZA57630

4.4 Measurement Controls

4.4 Measurement Controls
This section describes how to start and stop measurement with this instrument.
This instrument can perform sweep measurement and spot measurement.
Sweep measurement: This measures the impedance characteristics by sweeping any of
frequency, measurement signal amplitude, DC bias, and time.
The measurement results are displayed in a graph. There isup-sweeping to measure the sweep item in ascending order anddown-sweeping to measure the sweep item in descending order(time sweeping is only in ascending order).
Spot measurement: This measures at a fixed frequency, measurement signal amplitude,or DC bias. The measurement results are displayed as numericalvalues on the LCD.
Measurement is controlled with the MEASURE keys on the front panel.
REPEAT lamp

DOWN key: Start down-sweep measurement.

SPOT key: Start spot measurement.

UP key: Start up-sweep measurement.

STOP key: Stop measurement.

Example of screen after sweep measurement

Example of screen after spot measurement

Most operations, including saving and restoring settings or data and initialization, cannot be
performed during measurement. To perform such operations, stop the measurement.
■ Trigger source
If [Measure] − [TRIGGER SOURCE] is set to other than PANEL, measurement cannot be
controlled with the MEASURE keys on the front panel (key operation is ignored).
■ Measurement repeat control
The REPEAT key sets the automatic repeating of measurement. When the REPEAT lamp islit, both sweep and spot measurement will repeat. When the REPEAT lamp is not lit, this
instrument enters the wait state when measurement finishes. Pressing the REPEAT key
toggles the REPEAT lamp above the key on and off.
4-18

ZA57630

4.5 Setting Sweep Measurement

4.5 Setting Sweep Measurement
This section describes the basic settings for sweep measurement. The measurement results
are displayed in a graph. For more details on the functions, refer to “1.6 Graph Operations” inInstruction Manual (Advanced).
■ Setting the sweep item
This instrument can measure by sweeping any of frequency, measurement signal amplitude(voltage or current), DC bias, and time (zero-span sweep). Set the sweep item in [Sweep] [SWEEP ITEM].

2) Select thesweep item.

1) Tap SWEEP
ITEM.

[FREQUENCY]: Sweep the frequency.

[AMPLITUDE]: Sweep the measurement signal amplitude (voltage or current).

[DC BIAS]: Sweep the DC bias.

[ZERO−SPAN]: Zero-span sweep

In the case of the measurement signal amplitude sweep, whether voltage amplitude or current
amplitude sweeping is performed is determined by whether the setting unit of the measurement
signal is voltage or current. Refer to “■ Setting the amplitude and DC bias unit” in “4.3 Setting
Measurement Signals”.
For the zero-span sweep, measurement is performed using the same conditions withoutchanging the frequency, measurement signal amplitude, and DC bias.
■ Setting the sweep range
Set the range (upper limit and lower limit) for sweep measurement. Set the sweep upper limit
in [Sweep] − [SWEEP UPPER] and the sweep lower limit in [Sweep]－[SWEEP LOWER].

4-19

ZA57630

4.5 Setting Sweep Measurement
The unit for the upper and lower limits differs depending on the sweep item ([Sweep] −[SWEEP ITEM]) setting.
● Sweep range when zero-span sweep
The sweep range cannot be set for a zero-span sweep. The sweep lower limit is fixed to 0 s.
The sweep time is (the time required to perform one measurement (measurement time
setting)) × (the sweep density setting ([Sweep] − [SWEEP RESOLUTION])). When a zero-span
sweep is performed, the sweep upper time limit (sweep end time) may become even longer if
auto range, automatic high density sweep, or ALC is set.
■ Setting the display mode
Select the items to display on the X-axis, Y1-axis, and Y2-axis of the graph in [Graph] −[DISPLAY MODE X] / [DISPLAY MODE Y]. The items that can be selected differ depending on
the measurement mode. If a setting other than one in this table is set, nothing will be
displayed in the graph. LIN indicates the linear axis, and LOG the logarithmic axis.
Furthermore, “” and “×” indicate whether or not the linear axis or logarithmic axis can be set.
Table 4-1 Display Modes (Measurement Mode: IMPD−EXT / IMPD−3T / IMPD−2T)
X-axisLIN LOG Y1-axis LIN LOG Y2-axis LIN LOG
Remarks
*1
SWEEP


Z


θZ

×
*1
SWEEP


Y


θY

×
SWEEP

*1
R

×
X

×
*1
SWEEP


G

×
B

×
SWEEP

*1
CP

×
RP

×
*1
SWEEP


CP

×
D

×
*1
SWEEP


CP

×
QC

×
SWEEP

*1
CS

×
RS

×
*1
SWEEP


CS

×
D

×
*1
SWEEP


CS

×
QC

×
SWEEP

*1
LP

×
RP

×
*1
SWEEP


LP

×
QL

×
SWEEP

*1
LS

×
RS

×
*1
SWEEP


LS

×
QL

×
*1
SWEEP


εS

×
Dε

×
Relative permittivity
SWEEP

*1
εS'

×
εS''

×
Relative permittivity
*1
SWEEP


µS

×
Dµ

×
Relative permeability
*1
SWEEP


µS'

×
µS''

×
Relative permeability
SWEEP

*1
V1


V2


Voltage monitoring*2
*1
SWEEP


V


I

 Voltage/current monitoring*3
SWEEP*4



×

FREQ



×

θZ



×

R
R
G





×
×
×

X
-X
B





×
×
×

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

4-20

Resonant frequency
tracking measurement
Complex impedance plane

Cole-cole plot
Complex admittance plane

ZA57630

4.5 Setting Sweep Measurement*1: LOG can be set only when SWEEP ITEM is FREQUENCY or AMPLITUDE.
*2: When the measurement mode is IMPD−EXT*3: When the measurement mode is IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T*4: When SWEEP ITEM is ZER−SPAN
Table 4-2 Display Modes (Measurement Mode: G−PH)
X-axisLIN LOG Y1-axis

SWEEP
SWEEP
SWEEP
SWEEP
SWEEP
SWEEP
SWEEP*2









*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
×

dBR
R
a
dBR
R
V1
FREQ

θ
θ
a





×
×
×

dBR
R
b

*1

LIN

LOG

Y2-axis

LIN

LOG









×

×
×


×

θ
θ
b
GD*3
GD*3
V2
θ









×
×
×



×


×


×

×

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

Remarks

Bode plot(Resonantfrequency tracking
measurement)

Nichols plot
Nyquist plot

*1: LOG can be set only when SWEEP ITEM is FREQUENCY or AMPLITUDE.
*2: When SWEEP ITEM is ZER−SPAN*3: Can be set only when SWEEP ITEM is FREQUENCY.
The axis setting parameters are described and their units are given in the following table.
Table 4-3 Graph Axis Parameters (Measurement Mode: IMPD−EXT / IMPD−3T / IMPD−2T)
Axis setting

Description

Unit

SWEEP

This is the sweep item.
Select one of the following.
Frequency
measurement signal amplitude
DC biasZERO−SPAN|Impedance||Admittance|
Phase (impedance)
Phase (admittance)
Resistance
Reactance
ConductanceSusceptance
Parallel inductance
Series inductanceHz
Vrms / Arms
V/A
s
Ω
S
°
°
Ω
Ω
S
S
H
H

Z
Y
θZ
θY
R
X
G
B
LP
LS

4-21

ZA57630

4.5 Setting Sweep Measurement
Table 4-3 Graph Axis Parameters (Measurement Mode: IMPD−EXT / IMPD−3T / IMPD−2T) (Continued)
Axis setting
Description
Unit
CP
CS
RP
RS
QC
QL
D
Dε
Dµ
V1, V2, V*1
I*1
FREQ
εS
εS'
εS''
µS
µS'
µS''

Parallel capacitance
Series capacitance
Parallel resistance
Series resistance
Quality coefficient (capacitance)
Quality coefficient (inductance)
Dissipation factor (capacitance)
Dissipation factor (relative permittivity)
Dissipation factor (relative permeability)
Voltage amplitude
Current amplitude
Frequency
Relative permittivity
Complex relative permittivity (real part)
Complex relative permittivity (imaginary part)
Relative permeability
Complex relative permeability (real part)
Complex relative permeability (imaginary part)

F
F
Ω
Ω
None
None
None
None
None
Vrms
Arms
Hz
None
None
None
None
None
None

*1: V1, V2, V, and I are the voltage and current values measured by this instrument.
Whereas, impedance Z and other parameters are the results after various internalcorrections have been made, so (Z=V/I) does not necessary hold true.
Table 4-4 Graph Axis Parameters (Measurement Mode: G−PH)
Axis setting
SWEEP

R
dBR
θ
a
b
GD
V1,V2*1
FREQ

Description
This is the sweep item.
Select one of the following.
Frequency
measurement signal amplitude
DC biasZERO−SPAN|Gain||Gain|
Phase
Gain (real part)Gain (imaginary part)Group delay
Voltage amplitude
Frequency

Unit

Hz
Vrms / Arms
V/As
None (ratio)dB°
None (ratio)
None (ratio)
s
Vrms
Hz

*1: V1 and V2 are the voltage values measured by this instrument. Whereas, gain R andother parameters are the results after various internal corrections have been made, so(R=V1 / V2) does not necessary hold true.

4-22

ZA57630

4.5 Setting Sweep Measurement■ Formulas for converting measurement data to display parameters
This section describes the formulas for converting the various parameter formats that areused for measurement and display.
The magnitude of impedance and the phase obtained through measurement at frequency f[Hz] are Z [Ω] and θ[°], respectively. Furthermore, each parameter is defined as follows.
p = θ/ 180 [rad], angular frequency ω = 2f [rad/s]
Table 4-5 Display Parameter Conversion Formulas (Measurement Mode: IMPD−EXT / IMPD−3T / IMPD−2T)
Display parameter

Units

FormulaRemarksZ

ΩZ

Magnitude of impedance

θZ

°

θ

Phase of impedance

Y

S

1/Z

Magnitude of admittance

θY

°

−θ

Phase of admittanceRΩ

Z cos(p)ResistanceXΩZ sin(p)ReactanceGScos(p) / Z

ConductanceBS−sin(p) / Z

SusceptanceLS

H

Z sin(p) / ω

Series inductanceLP

H

Z / (ω sin(p) )Parallel inductanceCSF−1 / (Z ω sin(p) )Series capacitanceCPF−sin(p) / (Z ω)

Parallel capacitanceRSΩ

Z cos(p)Series resistanceRPΩ

Z / cos(p)Parallel resistance

QL

None

tan(p)

Quality coefficient (inductor)

QC

None

−tan(p)Quality coefficient (capacitor)

D

None

−1 / tan(p)Dissipation factor (capacitor)

Dε

None

εS'' / εS'

Dissipation factor (relative permittivity)

Dµ

None

µS'' / µS'

Dissipation factor (relative permeability)

εS

None

εS'2 + εS''2

Relative permittivity*1

εS'

None

CP / C0

Complex relative permittivity (real part)*1

εS''

None

1 / (ω C0 RP)

Complex relative permittivity(imaginary part)*1

µS

None

µS'2 + µS''2

µS'

None

µS''

None

LS / L 0(RS－RW) / (ω L0)

Relative permeability*2
Complex relative permeability (real part)*2
Complex relative permeability(imaginary part) *2*1: C0 is the virtual capacitance when the DUT is a dielectric substance in a vacuum. For
details on relative permittivity measurement, refer to “1.13 Relative Permittivity
Measurement” in Instruction Manual (Advanced).
*2: L0 is the virtual inductance when the DUT is a magnetic substance in a vacuum. RW is
the amount equivalent to the winding resistance of the DUT (coil). For details on relative
permeability measurement, refer to “1.14 Relative Permeability Measurement” inInstruction Manual (Advanced).
4-23

ZA57630

4.5 Setting Sweep Measurement
When the measurement mode is G−PH, the ratio of V1 and V2 and the phase obtained
through measurement at frequency f [Hz] are R [unitless] and θ[°], respectively. Furthermore,each parameter is defined as follows.
p = θ/ 180 [rad], angular frequency ω = 2f [rad/s]
Table 4-6 Display Parameter Conversion Formulas (Measurement Mode: G−PH)
Display parameter

Units

Formula

R

None

R

Gain

dBR

dB

20×log10(R)

Gain

θ

°

θ

Phase

a

None

R cos(p)Gain (real part)

b

None

R sin(p)Gain (imaginary part)GDs－∂p／∂ω

Group delay

4-24

Remarks

ZA57630

4.6 Setting Spot Measurement

4.6 Setting Spot Measurement
This section describes the basic settings for spot measurement.
Up to six parameters can be simultaneously measured and displayed in spot measurement.
In addition, unlike sweep measurement, there are no limitations on the parameters that canbe displayed simultaneously.
Set the parameters to display in spot measurement in [Measure] − [PRMTR1] to [PRMTR6].
(When measurement mode is IMPD−3T or IMPD−2T)

Tap the menu to display a palette listing the parameters that can be measured. Tap to select theparameters to measure and display in the palette. The measurement and display items can also
be changed by tapping the parameter buttons in the spot measurement result screen.
(When measurement mode is IMPD−3T or IMPD−2T)

If you select [NA], that parameter will be hidden (only PRMTR3 to 6). The types and formulasof parameters other than [STATUS] are the same as for sweep measurement. Refer to Table
4-3 and Table 4-6.
[STATUS] displays information such as the range and over-level information for measurement.
(Measurement Mode: IMPD−EXT and G−PH)

AUTO, 100mV, 50mV,

0Over-level information 0 to 15
PORT2 measurement range
PORT1 measurement range
FIX：When both PORT1 and PORT2 are fixed range
AUTO：When any of PORT1 and PORT2 are auto range
The over-level information is a decimal number from 0 to 13 with the following value added.
When PORT1 over+8

When PORT2 over+4

When ALC error

+1
4-25

ZA57630

4.6 Setting Spot Measurement(Measurement Mode 2: IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T)

AUTO, 100Ω,,0Over-level information 0 to 15(Blank)Measurement range
FIX：When fixed range
AUTO：When auto range
The over-level information is a decimal number from 0 to 15 with the following value added.
When voltage detection section over +8
When current detection section over +4
When range over+2

When ALC error

+1

4-26

ZA57630

5. Specifications

5.1 Measurement Modes ............................................................. 5-2
5.2 Measurement Value Display Ranges ..................................... 5-3
5.3 Measurement Connectors(Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT) ........................................ 5-5
5.4 Measurement Connectors(Measurement Mode IMPD−3T) .......................................... 5-8
5.5 Measurement Connectors(Measurement Mode IMPD−2T) ........................................ 5-11
5.6 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode G−PH)...... 5-14
5.7 Measured Signal Control Section ........................................ 5-18
5.8 Measurement Accuracy ....................................................... 5-20
5.9 Measurement Processing Section ....................................... 5-31
5.10 Display Section .................................................................. 5-35
5.11 Memory ............................................................................. 5-36
5.12 External Memory ............................................................... 5-36
5.13 External Input/Output Function .......................................... 5-37
5.14 Miscellaneous Specifications ............................................. 5-39

Nominal, Typical, Supplemental, and Approximate values
These values are supplemental data do not represent a guarantee of the performance of
this product.

5-1

ZA57630

5.1 Measurement Modes
Unless otherwise specified, the conditions are that 23°C ±5°C, warming up for at least 30
minutes.

5.1 Measurement Modes
Four measurement modes are available depending on the measurement purpose.
・Measurement mode IMPD−EXT
Impedance measurement mode
Conversion between current to voltage needs to be performed
externally.
DUT drive amplifier, probe, etc. can be used.
・Measurement mode IMPD−3T
Impedance measurement mode
Test fixture and test leads for LCR meters can be used.
・Measurement mode IMPD−2T
Impedance measurement mode
Stable measurement at high frequency is possible using an N
connector.
・Measurement mode G−PH
Gain-phase measurement mode
For measuring transfer characteristics of filters and amplifiers
The connector to use for measurement differs depending on the measurement mode setting.
・IMPD−EXT，IMPD−3T，G−PH: HCUR/OSC, HPOT/PORT1, LCUR/PORT2・IMPD−2T: PORT3

5-2

ZA57630

5.2 Measurement Value Display Ranges

5.2 Measurement Value Display Ranges
The actual measurement and display ranges for each parameter are limited by themeasurement range and frequency. The SI prefixes added before units represent a(10−18),
f(10−15), p(10−12), n(10−9), µ(10−6), m(10−3), k(103), M(106), and G(109), respectively. The S and P
suffixes of L, C, and R represent the series components and parallel components,
respectively.

5.2.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT
・Z (magnitude of impedance)0 Ω to 999.999 GΩ, resolution 6 digits or 1 aΩ・R, X (resistance, reactance)±(1 a to 999.999 G) Ω and 0 Ω, resolution 6 digits or 1 aΩ・Y (Magnitude of admittance)

0 S to 999.999 GS, resolution 6 digits or 1 aS

・G, B (conductance, susceptance)±(1 a to 999.999 G) S and 0 S, resolution 6 digits or 1 aS・LS, LP (inductance)±(1 a to 999.999 G) H and 0 H, resolution 6 digits or 1 aH

・CS, CP (capacitance)±(1 a to 999.999 G) F and 0 F, resolution 6 digits or 1 aF

・RS, RP (resistance)±(1 a to 999.999 G) Ω and 0 Ω, resolution 6 digits or 1 aΩ・θZ, θY (phase of impedance, phase of admittance)±180°−180.000° to 179.999°, resolution 0.001°

0 to 360°

0.000° to 359.999°, resolution 0.001°−360 to 0°−360.000° to −0.001°, resolution 0.001°

UNWRAP−9999.999° to +9999.999°, resolution 0.001°

・D, Dε, Dµ (dissipation factor)±(0.00001 to 99999.9) and 0 (unitless number)resolution 6 digits or 0.00001
・QC, QL (quality coefficient)±(0.00001 to 99999.9) and 0 (unitless number)resolution 6 digits or 0.00001
・V1, V2
Remark0 to 999.999 GVrms, resolution 6 digits or 1 aVrms
V1 and V2 are the voltages resulting from the PORT1
measurement voltage and PORT2 measurement voltage being
corrected (multiplied) by the respective input weighting factor
setting values.

・εS，εS'，εS''，µS，µS'，µS'' (relative permittivity, relative permeability)±(1 a to 999.999 G) and 0 (unitless number), resolution 6 digits or
1a・FREQUENCY

10 µHz to 36.000 000 000 00 MHz, resolution 10 µHz
This item is selectable when resonant frequency tracking
measurement.

5-3

ZA57630

5.2 Measurement Value Display Ranges

5.2.2

Measurement Mode IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T・Z(common to "・Z" in "5.2.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT")・R, X(common to "・R, X" in "5.2.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT")・Y(common to "・Y" in "5.2.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT")・G, B(common to "・G, B" in "5.2.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT")・LS, LP(common to "・LS, LP" in "5.2.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT")

・CS, CP(common to "・CS, CP" in "5.2.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT")

・RS, RP(common to "・RS, RP" in "5.2.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT")・θZ, θY(common to "・θZ, θY" in "5.2.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT")・D, Dε, Dµ(common to "・D, Dε, Dµ" in "5.2.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT")

・QC, QL(common to "・QC, QL" in "5.2.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT")・V (voltage)

0 to 9.99999 Vrms, resolution 6 digits or 1 aVrms

・I (current)

0 to 99.9999 mArms, resolution 6 digits or 1 aArms

・εS, εS', εS'', µS, µS', µS''
(common to "・εS, εS', εS'', µS, µS', µS" " in "5.2.1 Measurement Mode
IMPD−EXT")・FREQUENCY (common to "・FREQUENCY" in "5.2.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT")

5.2.3 Measurement Mode G−PH・GaindBR (gain dB)−999.999 dB to +999.999 dB, resolution 0.001 dB

R (absolute gain)

0 to 999.999 G (unitless number), resolution 6 digits or 1 aa (real part of gain)±(1 a to 999.999 G) or 0 (unitless number), resolution 6 digits or 1 ab (imaginary part of gain)±(1 a to 999.999 G) or 0 (unitless number), resolution 6 digits or 1 a・θ (phase)±180°−180.000° to +179.999°, resolution 0.001°

0 to 360°

0.000° to +359.999°, resolution 0.001°−360 to 0°−360.000° to −0.001°, resolution 0.001°

UNWRAP−9999.999° to +9999.999°, resolution 0.001°

・GD (group delay)±(1 a to 999.999 G)s and 0 s, resolution 6 digits or 1 as・V1, V2

0 to 999.999 GVrms, resolution 6 digits or 1 aVrms

Remark

V1 and V2 are the voltages resulting from the PORT1
measurement voltage and PORT2 measurement voltage being
corrected (multiplied) by the respective input weighting factor
setting values.

5-4

ZA57630

5.3 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT)

5.3 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT)
5.3.1 Front Panel HCUR/OSC
An AC signal for measurement and a normal DC bias can be output as signals formeasurement.
The AC signal for measurement is output from the front panel HCUR/OSC connector.
The normal DC bias is output from either the front panel HCUR/OSC connector or rear panel
DC BIAS OUT connector selected as the output destination.
HV DC bias cannot be used in measurement mode IMPD−EXT.
When the normal DC bias output destination is set to the front panel HCUR/OSC connector, asignal with the AC signal for measurement and normal DC bias composite is output from thefront panel HCUR/OSC connector.
Unless otherwise specified, DUT drive amplifier gain setting K = +1.0 and ALC is OFF
BNC connector (front panel HCUR/OSC)・Connector
・Frequency
Setting range

10 µHz to 36 MHz

Setting resolution

10 µHzAccuracy±10 ppm (when using internal reference clock)・Measurement signal amplitude
Setting range

0 to 999 GVrms
However, the setting range is limited to (0 to 3.0) × |K| Vrms by
DUT drive amplifier gain setting K.
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and normal DC bias setting.
(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Vrms] × 1.42) + | Normal DC bias
setting [V]| ≤ 5.0×|K|

Setting resolution

3 digits or MAC Vrms, whichever is the largest
MAC = 10K'. Here, K' indicates the maximum integer that does notexceed log10(|K|×10−5).
Example) When K = 9.8, K' = −5，and MAC = 10 µVrms.

Accuracy± 0.3 dB or less
Conditions: 1 kHz, 70 mVrms to 3.0 Vrms, no load

Frequency characteristics±0.3 dB or less (100 kHz or less)±0.5 dB or less (1 MHz or less)±1.0 dB or less (15 MHz or less)±3.0 dB or less (30 MHz or less)±4.0 dB or less (36 MHz or less)
Conditions: 1 kHz reference, 70 mVrms to 3 Vrms, use normal DC

5-5

ZA57630

5.3 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT)bias, DC bias setting 0 V, 50 Ω loadDistortion

0.2% or less (no load when 100 kHz or less, BW500 kHz, and3 Vrms output)

ALC

PORT1 / PORT2 / OFF
The range that can be controlled constantly will be narrower than
the setting range of the measurement signal amplitude depending
on product variations or DUT impedance.

Output limit
Setting range

1 aVrms to 999 GVrms

Setting resolution 3 digits or 1 aVrms, whichever is the largest
RemarkThis function prevents an excessive signal level being output due
to an incorrect setting. A measurement signal amplitude exceeding
the output limit setting cannot be output.

・Normal DC bias
Setting range−999 GV to +999 GV
However, the setting range is limited to −5.00 × K V to +5.00 × K V
by DUT drive amplifier gain setting K.
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and normal DC bias setting.
(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Vrms] × 1.42) + |Normal DC bias
setting [V]| ≤ 5.0×|K|

Setting resolution

3 digits or MDC V, whichever is the largest
MDC = 10K". Here, K" indicates the maximum integer that does notexceed log10(|K|×10−2).
Example: When K = 82, K" = −1 and MDC = 100 mV.

Accuracy±(|1% of normal DC bias setting [V]| + 3% of measurement signal amplitude setting[Vrms] + 30 mV)
RemarkWhen no load
Either the front panel HCUR/OSC or rear panel DC BIAS OUT is
selected for the output connector of the normal DC bias.

・Output impedance

50 Ω (nominal value)

・DUT drive amplifier gain setting K
Set the gain of the amplifier or attenuator that supplies themeasurement signal to the DUT.
The measurement signal amplitude and normal DC bias applied to
the DUT can be set directly.
Setting range±(1E−12 to 1E+12)

Setting resolution

3 digits or 1E−12, whichever is the largest

5-6

ZA57630

5.3 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT)

5.3.2 Front Panel HPOT/PORT1 and LCUR/PORT2・Input connectors

BNC connectors (front panel HPOT/PORT1 and LCUR/PORT2)

・Input Impedance

1 MΩ ±2%, 25 pF ±5 pF (HPOT) / 30 pF ±5 pF(LCUR) in parallel

・Maximum non-destructive input voltage
・Measurement range±20 V

10 mVrms to 5 Vrms(1−2−5 sequence) , 7 Vrms, and AUTO
PORT1 and PORT2 can be set individually.

Measurement range and maximum measurement input voltage
Measurement
Maximum measurement
range [rms]input voltage
10 mV±16 mV20 mV±31 mV50 mV±78 mV
100 mV±160 mV
200 mV±310 mV
500 mV±780 mV
1V±1.6 V2V±3.1 V
5V±7.8 V
7 V, AUTO±11 V
・Input weighting factor PORT1 and PORT2 can be set individually.
Setting range±(1.00000E−15 to 999.999E+09)

Setting resolution

6 digits or 1E−15

RemarkThis function corrects the conversion ratios of the voltage probe,current probe, shunt resistance, etc. for measurement.

・Over detection
Setting range
HPOT/PORT1

0 to 7 Vrms

LCUR/PORT2

0 to 7 Vrms

Setting resolution

3 digits or 1 µVrms, whichever is the largest.

Processing

Buzzer alarm sound (can be turned on/off)Stopping of measurement (can be turned on/off)

5.3.3 Rear Panel Normal DC Bias Output
・Connector

BNC connector (rear panel DC BIAS OUT)

・Setting range and setting resolution(Common to "・Normal DC bias" in "5.3.1 Front Panel HCUR/OSC")・Accuracy±(|1% of normal DC bias setting [V]| + 30 mV)・Output Impedance

600 Ω (nominal value)・Remark(Normal DC bias setting [V] ÷ K) [V] is output from the DC BIAS
OUT connector.
Either the front panel HCUR/OSC or rear panel DC BIAS OUT is
selected for the output connector of the normal DC bias.
5-7

ZA57630

5.4 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−3T)

5.4 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−3T)
5.4.1 Front Panel HCUR/OSC
An AC signal for measurement and a DC bias can be output as signals for measurement.
The AC signal for measurement is output from the front panel HCUR/OSC connector.
There are the two types of DC bias, the normal DC bias and HV DC bias, and the selected
type can be used.
The normal DC bias and HV DC bias are output from the front panel HCUR/OSC connector.
(The normal DC bias and HV DC bias cannot be output from the rear panel DC BIAS OUT
connector.)
A signal with the AC signal for measurement and DC bias composited is output from thefront panel HCUR/OSC connector.
Unless otherwise specified, the measurement signal amplitude is set as a voltage and ALC isOFF.
BNC connector (front panel HCUR/OSC)・Connector
・Frequency
Setting range

10 µHz to 36 MHz (when HV DC bias is off)
1 kHz to 36 MHz (when HV DC bias is on)

Setting resolution

10 µHzAccuracy(Common to "・Frequency" in "5.3.1 Front Panel HCUR/OSC")

・Measurement signal amplitude
Setting range
Voltage0 to 3.00 Vrms
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and normal DC bias setting.

(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Vrms] × 1.42) + |Normal DC bias
setting [V]| ≤ 5.0
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and HV DC bias setting.
(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Vrms] × 1.42) + |HV DC bias setting[V]| ≤ 42.0
Current

0 to 60 mArms
The setting range is limited because it is dependent on themeasurement range, etc.
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and normal DC bias setting.

(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Arms] × 71) + |Normal DC bias setting[A] × 50| ≤ 5.0

5-8

ZA57630

5.4 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−3T)
Setting resolution
Voltage

3 digits or 10 µVrms, whichever is the largest

Current

3 digits or 100 nArms, whichever is the largest

Accuracy
When voltage setting(Common to "・Measurement signal amplitude" in "5.3.1 Front

Panel HCUR/OSC")
When current setting
Frequency characteristics(nominal value)(Common to "・Measurement signal amplitude" in "5.3.1

Front Panel HCUR/OSC")
Distortion(Common to "・Measurement signal amplitude" in "5.3.1 Front Panel
HCUR/OSC")

ALC{CV (constant voltage) or CC (constant current)} / OFF
Operation is with a CV when the measurement signal amplitude is
set as a voltage and with a CC when it is set as a current.
The range that can be controlled constantly will be narrower than
the setting range of the measurement signal amplitude depending
on product variations or DUT impedance.

Output limit
Setting range
Voltage

10 µVrms to 3.00 Vrms

Current

100 nArms to 60 mArms

Setting resolution
Voltage

3 digits or 10 µVrms, whichever is the largest

Current

3 digits or 100 nArms, whichever is the largest

RemarkThis function prevents an excessive signal level being output due
to an incorrect setting. A measurement signal amplitude exceeding
the output limit setting cannot be output.

RemarkThe setting unit (voltage or current) is common for themeasurement signal amplitude and normal DC bias.

・Normal DC bias
Setting range
Voltage−5.00 V to +5.00 V
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and normal DC bias setting.

(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Vrms] × 1.42) + |Normal DC bias
setting [V]| ≤ 5.0
Current−100 mA to +100 mA
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal

5-9

ZA57630

5.4 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−3T)
amplitude setting and normal DC bias setting.
(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Arms] × 71) + |Normal DC bias setting[A] × 50| ≤ 5.0
Setting resolution
Voltage

10 mV

Current

100 nA

Accuracy
When voltage setting(Common to "・Normal DC bias" in "5.3.1 Front Panel

HCUR/OSC")
When current setting
Remark(nominal value)

The setting unit (voltage or current) is common for themeasurement signal amplitude and normal DC bias.
The normal DC bias and HV DC bias cannot be used at the sametime.

・HV DC bias
Setting range−40.0 V to +40.0 V (when no load)
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and HV DC bias setting.

(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Vrms] × 1.42) + |HV DC bias setting[V]| ≤ 42.0
Setting resolution

10 mV

Accuracy±(|1% of HV DC bias setting [V]| + 3% of measurement signal
amplitude setting [Vrms] + 30 mV)
However, when no load

Output Impedance

1 kΩ (nominal value)

Remark

The measurement lower limit frequency is 1 kHz when the HV DC
bias is used.
The normal DC bias and HV DC bias cannot be used at the sametime.

・Output Impedance

50 Ω (nominal value)
When the HV DC bias is on, approximately 1 kΩ at approximately
100 Hz or less.

5.4.2 Front Panel HPOT/PORT1 and LCUR/PORT2・Input connectors

BNC connectors (front panel HPOT/PORT1 and LCUR/PORT2)・Measurement range

10 Ω, 100 Ω, 1 kΩ, 10 kΩ, 100 kΩ, 1 MΩ, AUTO

5-10

ZA57630

5.5 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−2T)

5.5 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−2T)
5.5.1 Front Panel PORT3
An AC signal for measurement and a DC bias can be output as signals for measurement.
The AC signal for measurement is output from the front panel PORT3 connector.
There are the two types of DC bias, the normal DC bias and HV DC bias, and the selected
type can be used.
The normal DC bias and HV DC bias are output from the front panel PORT3 connector. (Thenormal DC bias and HV DC bias cannot be output from the rear panel DC BIAS OUT
connector.)
A signal with the AC signal and DC bias composited is output from the front panel PORT3
connector.
Unless otherwise specified, the measurement signal amplitude is set as a voltage and ALC isOFF.
N connector (front panel PORT3)

・Connector
・Frequency
Setting range

10 µHz to 36 MHz (when HV DC bias is off)
1 kHz to 36 MHz (when HV DC bias is on)

Setting resolution

10 µHzAccuracy(Common to "・Frequency" in "5.3.1 Front Panel HCUR/OSC")

・Measurement signal amplitude
Setting range
Voltage0 to 3.00 Vrms
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and normal DC bias setting.

(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Vrms] × 1.42) + |Normal DC bias
setting [V]| ≤ 5.0
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and HV DC bias setting.
(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Vrms] × 1.42) + |HV DC bias setting[V]| ≤ 42.0
Current

0 to 60 mArms
The setting range is limited because it is dependent on themeasurement range, etc.
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and normal DC bias setting.

(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Arms] × 71) + |Normal DC bias setting[A] × 50| ≤ 5.0

5-11

ZA57630

5.5 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−2T)
Setting resolution
Voltage

3 digits or 10 µVrms, whichever is the largest

Current

3 digits or 100 nArms, whichever is the largest

Accuracy
When voltage setting(Common to "・Measurement signal amplitude" in "5.3.1

Front Panel HCUR/OSC")
When current setting
Frequency characteristics(nominal value)(Common to "・Measurement signal amplitude" in "5.3.1

Front Panel HCUR/OSC")
Distortion(Common to "・Measurement signal amplitude" in "5.3.1 Front
Panel HCUR/OSC")

ALC{CV (constant voltage) or CC (constant current)} / OFF
Operation is with a CV when the measurement signal amplitude is
set as a voltage and with a CC when it is set as a current.
The range that can be controlled constantly will be narrower than
the setting range of the measurement signal amplitude depending
on product variations or DUT impedance.

Output limit
Setting range
Voltage

10 µVrms to 3.00 Vrms

Current

100 nArms to 60 mArms

Setting resolution
Voltage

3 digits or 10 µVrms, whichever is the largest

Current

3 digits or 100 nArms, whichever is the largest

RemarkThis function prevents an excessive signal level being output due
to an incorrect setting. A measurement signal amplitude exceeding
the output limit setting cannot be output.

Remarks

The setting unit (voltage or current) is common for themeasurement signal amplitude and normal DC bias.

・Normal DC bias
Setting range
Voltage−5.00 V to +5.00 V
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and normal DC bias setting.

(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Vrms] × 1.42) + |Normal DC bias
setting [V]| ≤ 5.0
Current−100 mA to +100 mA

5-12

ZA57630

5.5 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode IMPD−2T)
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and normal DC bias setting.
(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Arms] × 71) + |Normal DC bias setting[A] × 50| ≤ 5.0
Setting resolution
Voltage

10 mV

Current

100 nA

Accuracy
When voltage setting(Common to "・Measurement signal amplitude" in "5.3.1

Front Panel HCUR/OSC")
When current setting
Remark(nominal value)

The setting unit (voltage or current) is common for themeasurement signal amplitude and normal DC bias.
The normal DC bias and HV DC bias cannot be used at the sametime.

・HV DC bias
Setting range−40.0 V to +40.0 V (when no load)
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and HV DC bias setting.

(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Vrms] × 1.42) + |HV DC bias setting[V]| ≤ 42.0
Setting resolution

10 mV

Accuracy(Common to "・HV DC bias" in "5.4.1 Front Panel HCUR/OSC")

Output impedance

1 kΩ (nominal value)

Remark

The measurement lower limit frequency is 1 kHz when the HV DC
bias is used.
The normal DC bias and HV DC bias cannot be used at the sametime.

・Measurement range

1 Ω，10 Ω，100 Ω，1 kΩ，AUTO

5-13

ZA57630

5.6 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode G−PH)

5.6 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode G−PH)
5.6.1 Front Panel OSC/HCURAn AC signal for measurement and a normal DC bias can be output as signals formeasurement.
The AC signal for measurement is output from the front panel HCUR/OSC connector.
The normal DC bias is output from either the front panel HCUR/OSC connector or rear panel
DC BIAS OUT connector selected as the output destination.
HV DC bias cannot be used in measurement mode G−PH.
When the normal DC bias output destination is set to the front panel HCUR/OSC connector, asignal with the AC signal and normal DC bias composited is output from the front panel
HCUR/OSC connector.
Unless otherwise specified, DUT drive amplifier gain setting K = +1.0 and ALC is OFF
BNC connector (front panel HCUR/OSC)・Connector
・Frequency
Setting range

10 µHz to 36 MHz

Setting resolution

10 µHzAccuracy(Common to "・Frequency" in "5.3.1 Front Panel HCUR/OSC")

・Measurement signal amplitude
Setting range

0 to 999 GVrms
However, the setting range is limited to (0 to 3.0) × |K| Vrms by
DUT drive amplifier gain setting K.
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and normal DC bias setting.

(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Vrms] × 1.42) + |Normal DC bias
setting [V]| ≤ 5.0×|K|
Setting resolution

3 digits or MAC Vrms, whichever is the largest
MAC = 10K'. Here, K' indicates the maximum integer that does notexceed log10(|K|×10−5).
Example: When K = 9.8, K' = −5，and MAC = 10 µVrms.

Accuracy(Common to "・Measurement signal amplitude" in "5.3.1 Front
Panel HCUR/OSC")

Frequency characteristics(Common to "・Measurement signal amplitude" in "5.3.1

Front Panel HCUR/OSC")
Distortion(Common to "・Measurement signal amplitude" in "5.3.1 Front Panel
HCUR/OSC")ALC

PORT1 / PORT2 / OFF
The range that can be controlled constantly will be narrower than

5-14

ZA57630

5.6 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode G−PH)
the setting range of the measurement signal amplitude dependingon variations of the product or load/signal source impedance of the
DUT.
Output limit
Setting range

1 aVrms to 999 GVrms

Setting resolution 3 digits or 1 aVrms, whichever is the largest
RemarkThis function prevents an excessive signal level being output due
to an incorrect setting. A measurement signal amplitude exceeding
the output limit setting cannot be output.

・Normal DC bias
Setting range−999 GV to +999 GV
However, the setting range is limited to −5.00 × K V to +5.00 × K V
by DUT drive amplifier gain setting K.
There is a following restriction between the measurement signal
amplitude setting and normal DC bias setting.

(Measurement signal amplitude setting [Vrms] × 1.42) + | Normal DC bias
setting [V]| ≤ 5.0 ×|K|
Setting resolution

3 digits or MDC V, whichever is the largest
MDC = 10K". Here, K" indicates the maximum integer that does notexceed log10(|K|×10−2).
Example: When K = 82, K" = −1 and MDC = 100 mV.

Accuracy(Common to "・Normal DC bias" in "5.3.1 Front Panel HCUR/OSC")

RemarkEither the front panel HCUR/OSC or rear panel DC BIAS OUT is
selected for the output connector of the normal DC bias.

・Output Impedance

50 Ω (nominal value)

・DUT drive amplifier gain setting K
Set the gain of the amplifier or attenuator that supplies themeasurement signal to the DUT.
The measurement signal amplitude and normal DC bias applied to
the DUT can be set directly.
Setting range±(1E−12 to 1E+12)

Setting resolution

3 digits or 1E−12, whichever is the largest

5-15

ZA57630

5.6 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode G−PH)

5.6.2 Front Panel PORT1/HPOT and PORT2/LCUR
・Input connectors

BNC connectors (front panel

・Input Impedance

1 MΩ ±2 %, 25 pF ±5 pF (PORT1) / 30 pF±5 pF (PORT2) in parallel

・Maximum non-destructive input voltage
・Measurement range

PORT1/HPOT and PORT2/LCUR)±20 V

10 mVrms to 5 Vrms(1−2−5 sequence), 7 Vrms and AUTO
PORT1 and PORT2 can be set individually.

Measurement range and maximum measurement input voltage
Measurement
Maximum measurement
range [rms]input voltage
10 mV±16 mV20 mV±31 mV50 mV±78 mV
100 mV±160 mV
200 mV±310 mV
500 mV±780 mV
1V±1.6 V2V±3.1 V
5V±7.8 V
7 V, AUTO±11 V
・Input weighting factor PORT1 and PORT2 can be set individually.
Setting range±(1.00000E−15 to 999.999E+09)

Setting resolution

6 digits or 1E−15

RemarkThis function corrects the conversion ratios of the voltage probe,current probe, preamplifier, etc. for measurement.

・Over detection
Setting range
HPOT/PORT1

0 to 7 Vrms

LCUR/PORT2

0 to 7 Vrms

Setting resolution 3 digits or 1 µVrms, whichever is the largest.
Processing

Buzzer alarm sound (can be turned on/off)Stopping of measurement (can be turned on/off)・Dynamic range

110 dB typ (10 Hz to 1 MHz)
60 dB typ (1 MHz to10 MHz)
50 dB typ (10 MHz to 36 MHz)

(However, the largest of the port inputs is 3 Vrms and measurement time
setting 40 s or more)

5-16

ZA57630

5.6 Measurement Connectors (Measurement Mode G−PH)

5.6.3 Rear Panel Normal DC Bias Output
・Connector

BNC connector (rear panel DC BIAS OUT)

・Setting range and setting resolution(Common to "・Normal DC bias" in "5.3.1 Front

Panel HCUR/OSC")・Accuracy(Common to "・Accuracy" in “5.3.3 Rear Panel Normal DC Bias
Output”)・Output impedance

600 Ω (nominal value)・Remark(Normal DC bias setting [V] ÷ K) [V] is output from the DC BIAS
OUT connector.
Either the front panel HCUR/OSC or rear panel DC BIAS OUT is
selected for the output connector of the normal DC bias.

5-17

ZA57630

5.7 Measured Signal Control Section

5.7 Measured Signal Control Section
・Signal output control
Measurement synchronous drive
SYNC(AC+DC)

The measurement signal and DC bias are turned on at the start ofmeasurement and turned off at the end of measurement.

SYNC(AC)

The measurement signal is turned on at the start of measurement
and turned off at the end of measurement. The DC bias does notchange.

ASYNC

The measurement signal and DC bias are not changed at the startof measurement and end of measurement.

ON/OFF mode
QUICK

The measurement signal amplitude and DC bias changes
immediately.

SLOW

Output changes gradually over a period of approximately 10
seconds.

0° SYNC

This instrument waits until the measurement signal phasebecomes 0° and then output turns off

RemarkRegardless of the setting, output always turns on at phase 0°.

Frequency change mode
ASYNC

The frequency changes immediately.

0° SYNC

The frequency changes when the measurement signal phasebecomes 0°.

RemarkThe phase of the measurement signal is the phase at the signal
source inside this instrument. It may differ from the phase of thesignal applied to the DUT.

・Sweep
Sweep item

One of frequency, measurement signal amplitude, DC bias, andtime (zero span)

Sweep type

Either linear or log
Log can be set only when the sweep item is frequency ormeasurement signal amplitude.

Sweep control

SWEEP UP:

Sweeps in the direction of lower limit → upper
limit.

SWEEP DOWN: Sweeps in the direction of upper limit → lower
limit.
SPOT:

Measures with fixed frequency, measurement
signal amplitude, and bias.

REPEAT:

Repeats SWEEP or SPOT when turns on.

5-18

ZA57630

5.7 Measured Signal Control Section
Sweep density

3 to 2,000 steps/sweep

Sweep time
Frequency

From 0.5 ms/point
500 ms is added when frequency changes across 1 kHz.
(frequency < 1 kHz ↔ frequency ≥ 1 kHz)
5 ms is added when frequency changes across 30 kHz.
(frequency < 30 kHz ↔ frequency ≥Signal amplitude

From 2 ms/point

DC biasFrom 3 ms/point

Zero span

From 0.5 ms/point

5-19

30 kHz)

ZA57630

5.8 Measurement Accuracy

5.8 Measurement Accuracy
5.8.1 Measurement Mode IMPD−EXT and G−PH
The conditions are that ambient temperature of 0 to +40°C, within 12 hours sinceself-calibration was performed after warming up for at least 30 minutes, and ambient
temperature variations are within ±5°C after self-calibration.
DUT drive amplifier gain setting K = +1.0 and input weighting factor is 1.0 for both PORT1
and PORT2.
・Measurement accuracy

Relative accuracy + Calibration accuracy

・Relative accuracy±(basic accuracy + dynamic accuracy + inter-range accuracy)

・Calibration accuracy

Accuracy of external equipment connected to this instrument, suchas a shunt resistance, probe, or calibration standard

・Basic accuracy

Upper row:

Impedance Z (measurement mode IMPD−EXT)

Middle row: Gain (measurement mode G−PH)

Measurement
range
[rms]
7V
:
100 mV
50 mV
:
10 mV

Lower row: Phase
Measurement frequency [Hz]
1M
10 M
f≤
<f≤
<f≤
1M
10 M
36 M
0.12 %
0.01 dB
0.35 %
1.20 %
0.06°
0.03 dB
0.10 dB
0.24 %
0.18°
0.60°
0.02 dB
0.12°

Conditions: Largest or mre of measurement time setting 100 ms and (10 ÷measurement frequency [Hz]) s, measurement range of 10 mVrms to 7
Vrms, both ports have the same measurement range. The Z, gain andphase errors when full-scale signal (max. 3 Vrms) input of themeasurement range.
・Dynamic accuracy

Measurement
range
[rms]
7V
:
100 mV
50 mV
:
10 mV

Upper row:

Impedance Z (measurement mode IMPD−EXT)

Middle row:

Gain (measurement mode G−PH)

Lower row:
Phase
Measurement frequency [Hz]
1M
10 M
f≤
<f≤
<f≤
1M
10 M
36 M
0.24 %
0.35 %
1.20 %
0.02 dB
0.03 dB
0.10 dB
0.12°
0.18°
0.60°
1.20 %
0.10 dB
0.60°

Conditions: Largest or more of measurement time setting 100 ms and (10 ÷

5-20

ZA57630

5.8 Measurement Accuracy
measurement frequency [Hz]) s, measurement range of 10 mVrms to 7
Vrms, and both ports have the same range. Z, gain and phase variation
for when the signal level changes from full-scale (max. 3 Vrms) of
measurement range to 3/10. The input signal is 1:1 or 1:0.3 between
port.
・Inter-range accuracy

Measurement
range
[rms]
7V
5V

Upper row:

Impedance Z (measurement mode IMPD−EXT)

Middle row:

Gain (measurement mode G−PH)

Lower row:
Phase
Measurement frequency [Hz]
1M
10 M
f≤
<f≤
<f≤
1M
10 M
36 M
0.24 %
0.02 dB
0.12°

0.35 %
0.03 dB
0.18°

1.40 %
0.12 dB
0.72°(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)

1.20 %
0.10 dB
0.60°(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)(Same asabove)

2V
1V
500 mV
200 mV
100 mV
50 mV
20 mV
10 mV

0.35 %
0.03 dB
0.18°(Same asabove)

Conditions: Largest or more of measurement time setting 100 ms and (10 ÷measurement frequency [Hz]) s, and measurement range of 10 mVrms
to 7 Vrms. Z, gain and phase errors when difference of themeasurement ranges of both port is one and the input signal levels are
the same for both ports (full scale level of smallest measurement range,max. 3 Vrms).

5-21

ZA57630

5.8 Measurement Accuracy

5.8.2 Measurement Mode IMPD−3T
Unless otherwise specified, the conditions are that 0 to +40 °C, open and short correction was
performed after warming up for at least 30 minutes.
・Basic accuracy±0.08 %

・Measurement range
Measurement
range ZR
1 MΩ100 kΩ
10 kΩ
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω

Measurable
range
900 kΩ ≤90 kΩ ≤
9 kΩ ≤
900 Ω ≤
No limitation≤ 10 Ω

Measurable range:

Recommended range
1 MΩ to 11 MΩ
100 kΩ to 1.1 MΩ
10 kΩ to 110 kΩ
1 kΩ to 11 kΩ
9 Ω to 1.1 kΩ
1 Ω to 10 Ω

Approximate range in which measurementand display are possible (supplementary
value)

Recommended range: Operating range in which measurement
accuracy is high.
・Impedance measurement accuracy
Accuracy of |Z|±AZ [%]AZ ＝ {(A＋B×U＋KZ＋KY)×KV＋KB}×KT
Accuracy of phase angle θ of impedance±PZ [°]
when 10 kHz < f < 30 kHz and measurement range is 1 kΩ
PZ ＝ 0.573×{(1.5×A＋1.5×B×U＋KZ＋KY)×KV＋KB}×KT
when 10 kHz < f < 30 kHz and measurement range is 100 Ω
PZ ＝ 0.573×{(2×A＋2×B×U＋KZ＋KY)×KV＋KB}×KT
other than above
PZ ＝ 0.573×AZ
Remark

The measurement accuracy when AZ exceeds 10 % is a
supplementary value.
Excluding the highest and lowest measurement ranges that can beused with that frequency, the measurement accuracy for ameasured value smaller than half the lower limit of each
recommended measurement range or larger than twice the upper
limit is a supplementary value.

Each parameter value in the expression of AZ and PZ is listed below. The meaning of thesymbol used when calculating each parameter is shown below.

5-22

ZA57630

5.8 Measurement Accuracy
Zr: Measurement range [Ω]ZX: Measurement value [Ω] of magnitude of impedance |Z|
・U: Ratio coefficientZr≥ 1 kΩ
≤ 100 ΩU
|ZX / Zr − 1|
|Zr / ZX − 1|・A (upper row): Basic coefficient [%]B (lower row): Proportional coefficient [%]Measurement time setting is larger than (200 ms or (20 / measurement frequency[Hz]) s) or
more.
Measurement
range
Zr
1 MΩ
100 kΩ
10 kΩ
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω

Measurement
range
Zr
1 MΩ
100 kΩ
10 kΩ
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω

2m<f
≤1k
1.50
2.00
0.30
0.20
0.15
0.03
0.10
0.01
0.13
0.03
0.30
0.15

Measurement frequency [Hz]1k<f
30 k ≤ f< 30 k≤ 50 k
0.80--0.60--0.25
0.70
0.10
0.70
0.14
0.15
0.02
0.06
0.09
0.09
0.01
0.01
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.05
0.30
0.40
0.20
0.15

50 k < f≤ 100 k----0.40
0.40
0.20
0.03
0.14
0.02
0.06
0.10
0.40
0.15

100 k < f
≤1M--------0.20
0.03
0.15
0.01
0.15
0.03
0.40
1.20

Measurement frequency [Hz]
1M<f
2M<f
≤2M
≤5M
----------------0.80--0.30--0.20
0.35
0.07
0.35
0.15
0.20
0.05
0.20
0.50
1.50
2.00
5.00

5M<f
≤ 10 M----------------0.30
0.40
-----

The measurement accuracy in the "- - -" column is not guaranteed.

5-23

ZA57630

5.8 Measurement Accuracy
・KZ: Residual impedance coefficient [%]Frequency range
KZ [%]
f ≤ 1 MHz
2 / ZX [Ω]1 MHz < f ≤ 10 MHz
f [kHz]×2×10−3 / ZX [Ω]・KY: Residual admittance coefficient [%]Frequency range
KY [%]
f < 30 kHz
ZX [Ω] / (1×108)
30 kHz ≤ f ≤ 10 MHz
f [kHz]×ZX [Ω] / (3×109)
・KV: Signal level coefficient
When the measurement signal amplitude setting is less than 100 mVrms, themeasurement accuracy is not guaranteed.
When the signal level is set as a current, refer to Kv of the value calculated bymeasurement signal amplitude setting [Arms] × 71 as the signal level [Vrms].
When the measurement signal amplitude setting is 2.1 mArms, refer to KV of 2.1×
10−3 × 71 = 149 m[Vrms].
Measurement frequency ≤ 1 kHz
Measurement
range
Zr
1 MΩ
100 kΩ
10 kΩ
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω

100 m ≤
V
≤ 300 m
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.5
1.8
1.2

300 m <
V
≤ 500 m
2.5
1.8
1.5
1.2
1.1
1.1

Signal level [Vrms]
500 m <
800 m <
V
V
≤ 800 m< 1.00
2.0
1.0
2.0
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.2
1.0
1.1
1.0
1.1
1.0

V = 1.00
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

1.00 <
V≤ 3.00
1.0
2.0
2.5
3.5
4.0
1.8

1 kHz < Measurement frequency ≤ 30 kHz
Measurement
range
Zr
1 MΩ
100 kΩ
10 kΩ
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω

100 m ≤
V
≤ 300 m
5.0
3.5
2.5
2.0
2.5
1.1

300 m <
V
≤ 500 m
1.8
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.1

5-24

Signal level [Vrms]
500 m <
800 m <
V
V
≤ 800 m< 1.00
1.5
1.1
1.5
1.1
1.2
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.5
1.1
1.1
1.1

V = 1.00
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

1.00 <
V≤ 3.00
1.2
2.0
3.0
4.5
6.5
2.0

ZA57630

5.8 Measurement Accuracy
30 kHz < Measurement frequency ≤ 100 kHz
Signal level [Vrms]
Measurement
100 m ≤
300 m <
500 m <
800 m <
range
V
V
V
V
Zr
≤ 300 m
≤ 500 m
≤ 800 m< 1.00100 kΩ
8.0
2.5
1.8
1.1
10 kΩ
8.0
2.5
1.8
1.1
1 kΩ
6.5
2.0
1.5
1.1
100 Ω
6.0
2.0
2.0
1.1
10 Ω
1.2
1.1
1.2
1.1
100 kHz < Measurement frequency ≤ 1 MHz
Signal level [Vrms]
Measurement
100 m ≤
300 m <
500 m <
800 m <
range
V
V
V
V
Zr
≤ 300 m
≤ 500 m
≤ 800 m< 1.00
10 kΩ
5.0
1.8
1.5
1.0
1 kΩ
4.5
1.5
1.5
1.1
100 Ω
4.0
1.2
1.5
1.0
10 Ω
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

V = 1.00
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

V = 1.00
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

1.00 <
V≤ 3.00
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.0
1.8

1.00 <
V≤ 3.00
3.0
4.0
4.0
1.8

1 MHz < Measurement frequency ≤ 2 MHz
Measurement
range
Zr
10 kΩ
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω

100 m ≤
V
≤ 300 m
1.5
1.5
2.0
1.0

300 m <
V
≤ 500 m
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

Signal level [Vrms]
500 m <
800 m <
V
V
≤ 800 m< 1.00
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.0

2 MHz < Measurement frequency ≤ 10 MHz
Signal level [Vrms]
Measurement
100 m ≤
300 m <
500 m <
800 m <
range
V
V
V
V
Zr
≤ 300 m
≤ 500 m
≤ 800 m< 1.00
1 kΩ
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
100 Ω
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
10 Ω
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

5-25

V = 1.00
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

V = 1.00
1.0
1.0
1.0

1.00 <
V≤ 3.00
1.2
3.0
4.0
1.2

1.00 <
V≤ 3.002.0
2.0
1.0

ZA57630

5.8 Measurement Accuracy
・KB: DC bias coefficient [%]When the normal DC bias setting is 0.00 V, KB = 0%.
The KB [%] when the normal DC bias is output from the front panel HCUR/OSC is asshown in the table below. This is common for the voltage setting and current setting.
Normal DC bias
Measurement
range
Zr
1 MΩ
100 kΩ
10 kΩ
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω

Measurement frequency [Hz]1k<
30 k <f≤1k
f
f≤ 30 k≤ 10 M
5.0
2.0
--1.0
0.2
2.0
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.5

The KB [%] when the HV DC bias is enabled is as shown in the table below.
HV DC bias
Measurement
range
Zr
1 MΩ
100 kΩ
10 kΩ
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω

Measurement frequency [Hz]1k≤
30 k ≤
f
f< 30 k≤ 10 M
2.0
--0.5
2.0
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5

・KT: Temperature-dependent coefficientKT
Ambient temperature T[℃]
0 ～ +18
1＋k×(18−T)
1+18 ～ +28
+28 ～ +40
1＋k×(T−28)
・k: Temperature coefficient
Measurement
range
Zr
1 MΩ
100 kΩ
10 kΩ
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω

Measurement frequency [Hz]30 k ≤
1M<
5M<
f < 30 k
f
f
f
≤1M
≤5M
≤ 10 M
0.04------0.05
0.04----0.05
0.04
0.04--0.060.04
0.06--0.08
0.05
0.04
0.08
0.03
0.02
0.02
---

5-26

ZA57630

5.8 Measurement Accuracy

5.8.3 Measurement Mode IMPD−2T
Unless otherwise specified, the conditions are that 0 to +40 °C, open and short correction was
performed after warming up for at least 30 minutes.
・Basic accuracy±0.32 %

・Measurement range
Measurement
range
Zr
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω
1Ω

Measurable
range
No limitation≤ 110 Ω≤ 11 Ω
≤ 1.1 ΩMeasurable range:

Recommended range
90 Ω to 10 kΩ
9 Ω to 100 Ω
0.9 Ω to 10 Ω
0.09 Ω to 1 ΩApproximate range in which measurementand display are possible (supplementary
values).

Recommended range: Operating range in which measurement
accuracy is high.
・Impedance measurement accuracy
Accuracy of |Z|±AZ [%]AZ ＝ {(A＋B×U＋KZ＋KY)×KV＋KB}×KT

Accuracy of phase angle θ of impedance±PZ [°]
RemarkPZ ＝ 0.573×AZ

The measurement accuracy when AZ exceeds 10[%] is a
supplementary value.

Each parameter value in the expression of AZ is listed below. The meaning of the symbolused when calculating each parameter is shown below.
Zr: Measurement range [Ω]ZX: Measurement value [Ω] of magnitude of impedance |Z|
・U: Ratio coefficient
Measurement range
Zr
1 kΩ
Other than 1 kΩU
ZX / Zr (however, 0.1 when ZX / Zr < 0.1
Zr / ZX (however, 1 when Zr / ZX < 1

・A (upper row): Basic coefficient [%]・B (lower row): Proportional coefficient [%]Measurement time setting is larger than (200 ms or (20 / measurement frequency[Hz]) s) or
more.

5-27

ZA57630

5.8 Measurement Accuracy

Measurement
range
Zr
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω
1Ω

2m<
f
≤1k
0.20
0.15
0.30
0.03
0.20
0.40
0.40
3.00

Measurement frequency [Hz]1k<
30 k ≤
100 k <
1M<
f
f
f
f
< 30 k≤ 100 k≤1M
≤ 10 M
0.30
0.30
0.30
1.00
0.35
0.15
0.60
2.00
0.30
0.30
0.30
1.00
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.15
0.20
0.20
0.20
1.50
0.30
0.20
0.30
1.00
0.20
0.20
0.40
--3.00
2.00
2.50
---

10 M <f≤ 36 M----3.00
0.30---------The measurement accuracy in the "- - -" column is not guaranteed.
・KZ: Residual impedance coefficient [%]Frequency range
KZ [%]
f ≤ 100 kHz
0.02 / ZX [Ω]100 kHz < f ≤ 36 MHz
f [kHz]×2×10−4 / ZX [Ω]・KY: Residual admittance coefficient [%]Frequency range
KY [%]
f < 30 kHz
ZX / (1×106)
30 kHz ≤ f ≤ 1 MHz
f [kHz]×ZX [Ω] / (3×106)
1 MHz < f ≤ 36 MHz
f [kHz]×ZX [Ω] / (2×106)
・KV: Signal level coefficient [%]When the signal level is less than 100 mV, the measurement accuracy is notguaranteed.
When the signal level is set as a current, refer to Kv of the value calculated bymeasurement signal amplitude setting [Arms] × 50 as the signal level [Vrms].
When the measurement signal amplitude setting is 3.0 mArms, refer to KV of 3.0 × 10−3
× 50 = 150 m[Vrms].
Frequency < 30 kHz
Measurement
range
Zr
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω
1Ω

Signal level [Vrms]
100 m≤
300 m < 1.00 <VVV≤ 300 m≤ 1.00≤ 3.00
1.2
1.0
3.0
1.3
1.0
2.2
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.2

5-28

ZA57630

5.8 Measurement Accuracy
30 kHz ≤ Frequency ≤ 1 MHz
Measurement
range
Zr
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω
1Ω

100 m ≤
V
≤ 300 m
1.5
1.6
1.5
1.2

Signal level [Vrms]
300 m < 500 m <800 m <
V
V
V
≤500 m≤ 800 m≤ 1.00
1.0
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

1.00 <
V≤ 3.00
2.5
2.2
2.0
1.2

Signal level [Vrms]
300 m < 500 m <800 m <
V
V
V
≤500 m≤ 800 m≤ 1.00
1.0
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

1.00 <
V≤ 3.001.1
1.2
1.0

1 MHz < Frequency
Measurement
range
Zr
1 kΩ
100 Ω
10 Ω

100 m ≤
V
≤ 300 m
1.5
1.6
1.5

・KB: DC bias coefficient [%]When the HV DC bias is enabled, KB = 0.1 %.
The KB [%] when the normal DC bias is output from the front panel PORT3 is as shownin the table below. This is common for the voltage setting and current setting.
normal DC bias
Frequency range
0V≠0V
f ≤ 1 kHz
0.00
1.00
1 kHz < f0.00
0.05
・KT: Temperature-dependent coefficientKT
Ambient
temperature T[°C]f ≤ 10 MHz
10 MHz < f
0 to +18
1＋0.03×(18−T)
1＋0.04×(18−T)+18 to +28
1
1+28 to +40
1＋0.03×(T−28)
1＋0.04×(T−28)

5-29

ZA57630

5.8 Measurement Accuracy

5.8.4 Measurement Accuracy of Measurement Parameters Other Than Z and θ(Measurement Modes IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T)
Calculate the measurement accuracy from the impedance measurement accuracy as follows.
Here, QX is the measurement value of Q, DX is the measurement value of D, and θX is themeasurement value of θ. It is also acceptable to calculate the θX used for the accuracy
calculation by either (90° − tan−1|1/QX|) or (90° − tan−1|DX|).
Parameter
Measurement accuracy (supplementary value)|Y|，εS，µS ±AZ [%]LP，LS，X， ±AZ [%] (|QX|≥ 10)，±AZ / sinθX [%] (|QX|< 10)
εS'，µS'
CP，CS，B ±AZ [%] (|DX|≤ 0.1)，±AZ / sinθX [%] (|DX|>0.1)
RP，RS，G， ±AZ [%] (|QX|≤ 0.1)，±AZ / cosθX [%] (|QX|>0.1)
εS"，µS"Q±Qx2×Pe / (1−|QX|×Pe) (|QX|≥ 10 or |QX|×Pe≤ 0.1)
Here, phase angle error Pe [rad] = PZ [° ] / 57.3.
The measurement accuracy of Q is the actual value and not the %value.
D±(PZ [° ] / 57.3.) (|DX|≤ 0.1)
The measurement accuracy of D is the actual value and not the %value.

5.8.5 Measurement Accuracy of Measurement Parameters Other Than Gain and θ(Measurement Mode G−PH)
Calculate the measurement accuracy from the phase measurement accuracy as follows. Here,PG is the measurement accuracy [°] of θ.
Parameter
Measurement accuracy (supplementary value)
PG
GD
±
[s]
360×APT
Here, APT is the aperture frequency (⊿f [Hz]), and is aperture
setting*1 × sweep measurement frequency interval.
*1: "Aperture setting" is a parameter that is set in this instrument for group delay (GD)
measurement.

5-30

ZA57630

5.9 Measurement Processing Section

5.9 Measurement Processing Section
・Measurement time setting
Setting of time required for one measurement (in the case of sweep measurement, thesetting of the measurement time of not the entire sweep but of each point). Measurement
results are averaged within the range not exceeding the set time and the influence ofnoise is reduced.
Setting range

0 ms to 9,990 s

Setting resolution

3 digits or 0.1 ms, whichever is the largest
The minimum measurement time is approximately the following
time depending on measurement frequency f.
f < 1.36 kHz:

Remark(1 / f) s< 30 kHz:

0.8 ms to 1.5 ms≤ 36 MHz:

0.5 msA time longer than the minimum measurement time is required formeasurement regardless of the setting.
The measurement delay time and measurement start delay time
are not included. The time resulting from adding these delay times
to the measurement time setting will be the actual measurement
time.
The measurement time may become longer than the set time due to
auto ranging and other processing.

・Measurement delay function

This function delays the start of measurement after the

sweep parameters are changed.
Setting range

0 to 9,990 s

Setting resolution

3 digits or 0.1 ms, whichever is the largest

・Measurement start delay function

This function delays the start of measurement

only when sweeping starts.
Setting range

0 to 9,990 s or MANual

Setting resolution

3 digits or 0.1 ms, whichever is the largest

RemarkMANual is a function for sequence measurement. For every
sequence, sweep measurement enters the wait state until the UP or
DOWN key is pressed.

・Automatic high density sweep (slow sweep)
When there is a sudden change in the measurement data during frequency sweep
measurement, this function performs measurement by automatically increasing thefrequency sweep density in the regions before and after that point. This function isdisabled when the sweep item is set to other than frequency. If the number ofmeasurement frequency points exceeds 20,000 in one sweep, sweep measurement is

5-31

ZA57630

5.9 Measurement Processing Section
stopped.
Variation limit setting○ Measurement modes IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2TZ

1 a to 999 GΩ, setting resolution 3 digits or 1 aΩ, whichever is thelargestY

1 a to 999 GS, setting resolution 3 digits or 1 aS, whichever is thelargestθ

0.001 to 179.999°, setting resolution 0.001°○ Measurement mode G−PH
GainLinear

1 a to 999 G, setting resolution 3 digits or 1 a, whichever is thelargestLogθ0.001 to 999.999 dB, setting resolution 0.001 dB
0.001 to 179.999°, setting resolution 0.001°

・Sequence measurement function
This function performs measurements according to the contents of setting memory(condition file).
When up sweeping is performed, the first up sweep is performed over the sweep range set
in condition file number 1, the next up sweep is performed over the range set in condition
file number 2, and so on continuously up to the upper limit condition file number. For
down sweeping, the first down sweep is performed over the range set in the upper limit
condition file number, the next down sweep is performed over the range set in the next
condition file number down (upper limit condition file number minus 1), and so on
continuously down to condition file number 1. With the exception of zero span, sequence
measurement is performed with frequency, measurement signal amplitude, and DC bias
sweeping. Furthermore, the sweep items in sequence measurement are common.
Upper limit condition file number

1 to 32

Setting resolution

1

・Resonant frequency tracking function
This function automatically keeps the measurement frequency tracked to the resonancefrequency of the DUT. The resonant frequency is the frequency at which the measurement
phase becomes the target phase.
Target phase−179.999 to +180.000°, setting resolution of 0.001°

Allowable error

0.001 to 179.999°, setting resolution of 0.001°

Frequency correction factor

1 to 100%, setting resolution of 1%

RemarkThis is the rate for changing the measurement frequency
when the resonance frequency of the DUT changed.

Phase polarity

POS (positive) or NEG (negative)

5-32

ZA57630

5.9 Measurement Processing Section
RemarkSpecify the sample characteristics – specifically whether
the phase increases (POS) or decreases (NEG) as thefrequency increases.

・Equivalent circuit estimation function (Measurement modes IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and
IMPD−2T)
Estimate each constant of the following equivalent circuits from the frequency sweep
measurement results.
CKT 1

CKT 2

CKT 3

CKT 4

CKT 5

CKT 6

・Piezoelectric constant calculation function (Measurement modes IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and
IMPD−2T)
Calculates the following piezoelectric related constants from the frequency sweep
measurement results.
Piezoelectric constant calculation
Calculates the piezoelectric constants, piezoelectric parameters,
resonant frequency, etc.
Simulation

Calculates and displays the admittance characteristics from thepiezoelectric parameters.

・Comparator
SPOT measurement results

Max. 14 bins

SWEEP measurement results
Upper limit and lower limit comparison
Number of comparison settings 1 to 20
・Discharge protection (Measurement mode G−PH)

Supplementary value

Protection tolerance

2 J or less (voltage 100 V or less)

RemarkFor voltage V[V], the energy stored in capacitance C[F] is 0.5 × C
× V2 [J].

5-33

ZA57630

5.9 Measurement Processing Section

5.9.1 Error Correction Function(Measurement mode IMPD−EXT)
・Slope compensation

This function performs analysis that is unaffected by the DC
level for signals that have a composited DC level that varies
linearly over time. It is used when measuring the impedance ofbatteries during charging and discharging.

(Measurement modes IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and IMPD−2T)
・Open correction

Corrects the stray admittance.

・Short correction

Corrects the residual impedance.

・Load correction

Corrects the voltage-current conversion coefficient of themeasurement system.

Load standard value
・Port extension

Standard values can be entered for up to 30 frequency points.
Corrects the error due to phase delay in cables for 2-terminal
measurements.

Characteristic impedance
Setting range

1.00 to 999 Ω, setting resolution 3 digits

Electrical length
Setting range

0.000 to 999.999 m, setting resolution 0.001 m

Open correction

Corrects the stray admittance at the extended port end.

Short correction

Corrects the residual impedance at the extended port end.

Load correction

Corrects the mismatch, etc. of the characteristic impedance atthe extended port.

Load standard valueStandard values can be entered for up to 30 frequency points.

(Measurement mode G−PH)
・Equalizing

This function acquires the characteristics of only the EUT bymeasuring the frequency characteristics of the measurement
system (sensors, cables, etc.) in advance and then eliminating
the error components of the measurement system when actual
measurements are taken later.

(Measurement modes IMPD−EXT and G−PH)
・Self-calibration
This function measures and corrects the measurement errorsthat arise within this instrument itself.

5-34

ZA57630

5.10 Display Section

5.10 Display Section
・Display unit

8.4-inch color TFT-LCD (SVGA) with touch panel

・Graphs

Bode plot, Nyquist plot,
Cole-cole plot (Measurement modes IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and
IMPD−2T only)・Graph display styles
SINGLEOne graph is displayed on the LCD.

SPLIT

Two graphs are displayed, one above the other.

・Graph axis setting

The X, Y1, and Y2 axes can each be set to Lin/Log individually.

・Graph traces

9 traces of measurement data (MEAS) and reference data (REF 1 to
8)・Auto scaling

On or off
This function automatically optimizes the graph display scale.

・Marker display

Markers are displayed on a graph, and the data at a marker
position is displayed as a numerical value.

・Number of markers

Max. 8

・Marker search function
Search items
Max，Min

Search for the maximum and minimum values.

Peak，Bottom

Search for the peak (maximal) and bottom (minimal) values.

NextPeakSearch for the next peak.

NextBottom

Search for the next bottom.

PrevPeakSearch for the previous peak.

PrevBottom

Search for the previous bottom.

Value

Search for the marker value.

⊿ValueSearch for the difference between the reference marker and searchmarker values.

XValueSearch for the sweep parameter.

BW1

Display the passband gain and cutoff frequency.

BW2

Display the center frequency and pass bandwidth.

BW3

Display the notch frequency and notch bandwidth.

A search can be performed automatically at the end of sweep measurement.

5-35

ZA57630

5.11 Memory

5.11 Memory
・Measurement conditions

32 sets (per measurement mode)・Measurement data (MEAS)

Data from sweep measurement

Up to 32 sets of data can be saved to the internal storage of this
instrument.
・Reference data (REF) Data (up to 8 sets) that can be displayed on a graph together withmeasurement data (MEAS)
This can be measurement data or data copied from a USB memory
device. The display can be turned on or off.
・Error correction data

Open correction (32 sets), short correction (32 sets), load correction(32 sets), open correction at port extension tip (32 sets), shortcorrection at port extension tip (32 sets), load correction at port
extension tip (32 sets), equalizing (32 sets)

Except for data not saved in the internal storage are retained, even if the power is turned off.

5.12 External Memory
・MediaUSB memory device

・Connector

Front panel, USB-A connector

・File system

FAT・Saved items

Setting conditions, measurement data (MEAS) and reference data
(REF 1 to 8), equivalent circuit estimation results, piezoelectric
constant calculation results, and marker information

・File format

CSV format

・Screen capture function

A screen capture of the LCD screen can be saved to a USB
memory device.

File format

Microsoft Window bitmap file (.BMP)

File size

Approx. 1.9 MB

File name

ZAnnn.BMP(nnn: three-digit number, incremented automatically, initial value
can be set)

5-36

ZA57630

5.13 External Input/Output Function

5.13 External Input/Output Function
・GPIB
Standards conformanceIEEE488.1，IEEE488.2

Connector

Rear panel, GPIB connector

Interface functions

SH1,AH1,T6,L4,SR1,RL1,PP0,DC1,DT0,C0,E1

・USB
Specification

USB 2.0 High Speed

Connector

Rear panel, USB-B connector

Device class

TMC

・LAN
Specification

10/100Base−T

Connector

Rear panel, RJ-45 connector

ProtocolTCP/IP (socket communication)

・RS−232
Connector

Rear panel, RS-232 connector (D-sub 9-pin, male, inch screw
thread)Baud rate

4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 / 230400 bps
At a baud rate that exceeds 19200 bps, the characteristics of thecable and controller may prevent communication.

Flow control

None, software (X-ON/X-OFF), hardware (RTS/CTS)

・External monitor

For connecting a projector or external monitor, etc.

Connector

Rear panel, analog VGA connector (mini D-sub 15-pin, female)Signal800 × 600 dot (SVGA), analog RGB component video signal

・Reference clock input
Connector

Rear panel, BNC connector

Input impedance

300 Ω (nominal value), AC coupling

Frequency

Within 10 MHz ±100 ppm

Input waveform

Sinusoidal or square

Input voltage

0.5 Vp−p to 5 Vp−p

Maximum non-destructive input voltage
Signal grounding

10 Vp−pIsolated from the enclosure, max. 42 Vpk (DC + ACpk)

・Reference clock output
Connector

Rear panel, BNC connector

Output impedance

50 Ω (nominal value), AC coupling

Frequency

10 MHz ±10 ppm (when using internal reference clock)
When this instrument is operating with an external reference clock,the input reference clock frequency is output as is.

Output waveform

1 Vp−p / 50 Ω, square waveform

5-37

ZA57630

5.13 External Input/Output Function
・Handler interface(This can be used in Measurement modes IMPD−EXT, IMPD−3T and

IMPD−2T.)
Signal isolation

All I/O signals are optically isolated (withstand voltage ±42 V)

Input signal

Trigger, setting condition file number

Output signal

Sorting results BIN1 to BIN14

・Expansion connector

This connector is for expansion. Do not connect a device other than
one specified by NF Corporation.

Connector

Rear panel, AUX connector

5-38

ZA57630

5.14 Miscellaneous Specifications

5.14 Miscellaneous Specifications
・Power input
Voltage

AC 100 V to 230 V ±10 %, however 250 V or lessFrequency

50 Hz / 60 Hz ±2 Hz

Power consumption Max. 100 VA
Overvoltage category II・Cooling

Forced air cooling, rear exhaust・Installation attitude

Horizontal (within ±10°)・Environmental conditions
Operation

0 to +40 °C, 5 to 85 %RH(However, absolute humidity 1 to 25 g/m3, no condensation)
AltitudeStorage2000 m or less

−10 to +50 °C, 5 to 95 %RH(However, absolute humidity 1 to 29 g/m3, no condensation)

Pollution degree

2 (indoor use)

%RH
90
80

Storage

Operation

70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0

10

0

10

20

30

40

50 C

・External dimensions

430 (W) × 177 (H) × 350 (D) mm (excluding protruding parts)

・Weight

Approx. 7.0 kg (excluding accessories)

・Safety standards and EMC

EN61010−1，EN61010−2−030

EN61326−1(Group1，ClassA)，EN61326−2−1
Remark: Applies to products with CE marking displayed on therear panel.
・RoHS Directive

Directive2011/65/EU

・Warm-up time

At least 30 minutes

・Calibration cycle

1 year

5-39

ZA57630

5.14 Miscellaneous Specifications

Figure 5-1 External dimensions

5-40

ZA57630MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMSWINDOWS EMBEDDED 8.1 INDUSTRY PRO, WINDOWS EMBEDDED 8.1 INDUSTRY PROTABLET, WINDOWS EMBEDDED 8.1 INDUSTRY PRO SMALL TABLET AND WINDOWSEMBEDDED 8.1 INDUSTRY PRO RETAILThis is a license agreement between you and NF Corporation that describes your rights touse Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro, Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro Tablet,
Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro Small Tablet or Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro
Retail (“Windows Embedded Industry”).
The software on this device includes software licensed from Microsoft Corporation or its
affiliate.
For your convenience, we’ve organized this agreement into two parts. The first part includes
introductory terms phrased in a question and answer format and the Additional Terms follow
and contain greater detail. You should review the entire agreement, including any linked
terms, because all of the terms are important and together create this contract that applies toyou. You can review linked terms by pasting the forward link into your browser window oncethe software is running. The Additional Terms contain a binding arbitration clause andclass action waiver. If you live in the United States, these affect your rights to resolve a
dispute with NF Corporation, or with Microsoft, so you should read them carefully.
By accepting this agreement or using the software, you agree to all of these terms andconsent to the transmission of certain information during activation and forInternet-based features of the software. If you do not accept and comply with theseterms, you may not use the software or its features. Instead, you may contact NF
Corporation to determine its return policy for a refund or credit under that policy.
How can I use the software? We do not sell our software or your copy of it – we only license
it. The software may require a key to install or access it. If it does, you are responsible for theuse of keys assigned to you. You should not share the keys with third parties.
May I make a backup copy? Yes, you may make a single copy of the software for backup
purposes, and use that backup copy as described below.
What about updating the software? If the software covered by this agreement is an update
to your existing operating system software, the update replaces the original software. You do
not retain any rights to the original software after it has been updated and you may notcontinue to use it or transfer it in any way. This agreement governs your rights to use theupdate software and replaces the agreement for the software from which it was updated.
After the update is complete, some apps may not migrate or may be incompatible with
Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro and additional software may be required to play backor record certain types of media, including DVDs.

I

ZA57630

Can I transfer the software to another device? You may transfer the software directly toanother user, only with the licensed device. The transfer must include the software, proof ofpurchase, and, if provided with the device, an authentic Windows label such as the certificate
of authenticity label, including the product key. You may not keep any copies of the softwareor any earlier version. Before any permitted transfer, the other party must agree that thisagreement applies to the transfer and use of the software.
How does Internet activation work? The first time you or NF Corporation connect to theInternet while using the software, the software will automatically contact Microsoft or its
affiliate to confirm the software is genuine, and the license is associated with the licensed
device. This process is called “activation.” Because activation is meant to identify
unauthorized changes to the licensing or activation functions of the software, and tootherwise prevent unlicensed use of the software, you or NF Corporation may not bypass
or circumvent activation.
Does the software collect my personal information? If you connect your device to theInternet, some features of the software may connect to Microsoft or service provider
computer systems to send or receive information, including personal information. You may
not always receive a separate notice when they connect. If you choose to use any of thesefeatures, you agree to send or receive this information when using that feature. Many ofthese features can be switched off or you can choose not to use them.
How does Microsoft use your information? Microsoft uses the information it collects
through the software features to upgrade or fix the software and otherwise improve our
products and services. In certain circumstances, Microsoft also share it with others. For
example, Microsoft share error reports with relevant hardware and software vendors, so thatthey can use the information to improve how their products run with Microsoft products. You
agree that Microsoft may collect, use and disclose the information as described in the Privacy
Statements at go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=301572.
What does this agreement apply to? This agreement applies to the software, the media on
which you received the software, if received on media, and any Microsoft updates,
supplements, and services for the software, unless other terms come with them. If you obtain
updates or supplements directly from Microsoft, then Microsoft, and not NF Corporation,
licenses those to you.
Are there things I am not allowed to do with the software? Yes. Because the software islicensed, not sold, NF Corporation and Microsoft reserve all rights (such as rights underintellectual property laws) not expressly granted in this agreement. In particular, this licensedoes not give you any right to, and you may not: use the software for commercial software
hosting services; use features of the software separately; publish, copy (other than thepermitted backup copy), rent, lease or lend the software; transfer the software (except aspermitted by this agreement); attempt to circumvent technical protection measures in thesoftware, reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the software, except if the laws whereII

ZA57630

you live permit this even when our agreement does not. In that case, you may do only what
your law allows. When using Internet-based features or Microsoft Family Safety, you may not
use those features in any way that could interfere with anyone else’s use of them, or to try togain access to any service, data, account or network, in an unauthorized manner.

ADDITIONAL TERMS
1.

License Rights

The software license is permanently assigned to the device (physical hardware system) withwhich you acquired the software. You may only use the software on that device.
a.

Specific Use. NF Corporation designed licensed device for a specific use. You may
only use the software for that use.

b.

Usage rights relative to Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro Retail. You may use
the software with a point of service “POS” application. A POS application is a
software application which provides any of the following functions:·process sales and service transactions·

scan and track inventory·

record or transmit customer information·

perform related management functions·

provide information directly and indirectly to customers about available
products and services.

You may not use the software on a device with automated teller machine (“ATM”)
as the primary functionality.
If your industry system performs desktop functions, then you must ensure thatthey:·

are only used to support the industry application, and·operate only when used with the industry application.

“Desktop functions,” as used in this agreement, include word processing,spreadsheets, database, scheduling or personal finance. Your industry system
must not be used as a general-purpose personal computing device. You may use
other programs with the software as long as the other programs·

directly support the manufacturer’s specific use for the device, orIII

ZA57630·

provide system utilities, resource management, or anti-virus or similarprotection.
c.

Cloud Applications. If your industry system uses Internet browsing functionality toconnect to cloud hosted applications:• no desktop functions may run locally on the industry system, and• any files that result from the use of desktop functions may not bepermanently stored on the industry system.
d. Storage/Network Use. You may also store or install one (1) copy of the software
on a storage device, such as network server, used only to install or run thesoftware on your other industry systems over an internal network; however, youmust acquire and dedicate an additional license for each separate industry system
on or from which the software is installed, used, accessed, displayed or run. Except
as otherwise permitted by Remote Assistance features described below, a license
for the software may not be shared or used concurrently on different industry
systems.
e. Multiple or Pooled Connections. Hardware or software you use to multiplex orpool connections, or reduce the number of devices that access or use the software,
does not reduce the number of licenses you need. You may only use such
hardware or software if you have a license for each copy of the software you areusing.
f.

Device Connections. You may permit a maximum of twenty (20) computers orother electronic devices (each a “Device”) to connect via Server Message Bloc
(SMB) to the industry system to utilize one or more of the following services of thesoftware: file services, print services, Internet information services, Internet
connection sharing and telephony services. The twenty connection maximum
includes any indirect connections made through “multiplexing” or other softwareor hardware which pools or aggregates connections. Unlimited inboundconnections are allowed via TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol (“TCP”) and theInternet Protocol (“IP”).

g. Remote Access. The software contains Remote Desktop and Remote Assistancetechnologies that enable the software or applications installed on the licensed
device to be accessed remotely from other devices.
·

Remote Desktop. The single primary user of the licensed device may access asession from any other device using Remote Desktop or similar technologies.
A “session” means the experience of interacting with the software, directly or
indirectly, through any combination of input, output and display peripherals.
Other users, one at a time, may access the licensed software running on thisIV

ZA57630

host device, from any device using Remote Desktop, but only if the remotedevice is separately licensed to run Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro.
·

Remote Assistance. You may use Remote Assistance or similar technologies toshare an active session without obtaining any additional licenses for thesoftware. Remote Assistance allows one user to directly connect to anotheruser’s device, usually to correct problems.

h. Device. In this agreement, “device” means a hardware system with an internal
storage device capable of running the software. A hardware partition or blade isconsidered to be a device. The software is licensed to run on up to two processors
on the licensed device.
i.

Multiple versions. The software includes multiple versions (such as 32-bit and64-bit versions), and you or NF Corporation may install only one of those versions
at a time. Installing the 32-bit version of Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro on
this system requires a change to the BIOS settings to legacy BIOS mode. If you
switch to the 64-bit version of Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro from the32-bit version of Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro, then you should revert
back to the original BIOS settings. If you do not revert back to these BIOS settings
when switching back to the 64-bit version, the following Windows Embedded 8.1
Industry Pro functionalities will not work as they rely on UEFI mode boot:·

Secure Boot,·

Seamless Boot experience,·

Network unlock for Bitlocker for computer with a Trusted Platform Module(TPM) and·eDrive support.

Reverting back to UEFI mode will require a hard drive reformat. All data andpersonal settings will be lost. It is highly recommended that you back up yourdata before you revert back to UEFI mode.
2.

Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waivera.

Application. If you live in the United States, this Section 2 applies to any dispute
EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO THE ENFORCEMENTOR VALIDITY OF YOUR, NF Corporation’S, MICROSOFT’S, OR EITHER OF OUR
LICENSORS’ INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute means any dispute,action, or other controversy between you and NF Corporation, or you andMicrosoft, concerning the software (including its price) or this agreement, whether
in contract, warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other legal or
equitable basis. “Dispute” will be given the broadest possible meaning allowable
V

ZA57630

under law.
b.

Notice of Dispute. In the event of a dispute, you, or NF Corporation must give theother a Notice of Dispute, which is a written statement of the name, address andcontact information of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute, andthe relief requested. You must send any Notice of Dispute by U.S. Mail to NF
Corporation, ATTN: Legal Department. NF Corporation will send any Notice of
Dispute to your U.S. Mail address if available, or otherwise to your e-mail address.
You and NF Corporation will attempt to resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60days, you or NF Corporation may commence arbitration.

c.

Small claims court. You may also litigate any dispute in small claims court in yourcounty of residence or the NF Corporation’s principal place of business, if the
dispute meets all requirements to be heard in the small claims court. You may
litigate in small claims court whether or not you negotiated informally first.

d.

Binding arbitration. If you and NF Corporation, or Microsoft, do not resolve
any dispute by informal negotiation or in small claims court, any other effort
to resolve the dispute will be conducted exclusively by binding arbitration
governed by the Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”). You are giving up the rightto litigate (or participate in as a party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be resolved before a neutral
arbitrator, whose decision will be final except for a limited right of appeal under
the FAA. Any court with jurisdiction over the parties may enforce the arbitrator’saward.

e.

Class action waiver. Any proceedings to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an individual basis. Neither you, NF
Corporation, nor Microsoft, will seek to have any dispute heard as a classaction, private attorney general action, or in any other proceeding in which
any party acts or proposes to act in a representative capacity. No arbitrationor proceeding will be combined with another without the prior writtenconsent of all parties to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.

f.

Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration will be conducted by the American
Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration Rules. If you
are an individual and use the software for personal or household use, or if thevalue of the dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not you are an individual or how
you use the software, the AAA Supplementary Procedures for Consumer-Related
Disputes will also apply. To commence arbitration, submit a Commercial
Arbitration Rules Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You may request atelephonic or in-person hearing by following the AAA rules. In a dispute involving$10,000 or less, any hearing will be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds goodVI

ZA57630

cause to hold an in-person hearing instead. For more information, see adr.org orcall 1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence arbitration only in your county ofresidence or in the NF Corporation’s principal place of business. NF Corporationagrees to commence arbitration only in your county of residence. The arbitrator
may award the same damages to you individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief only to you individually, and only to theextent required to satisfy your individual claim.
g.

Arbitration fees and incentivesi.

Disputes involving $75,000 or less. NF Corporation will promptly reimburse
your filing fees and pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. If you
reject the NF Corporation’s last written settlement offer made before thearbitrator was appointed (“last written offer”), your dispute goes all the way
to an arbitrator’s decision (called an “award”), and the arbitrator awards you
more than the last written offer, NF Corporation will give you threeincentives: (1) pay the greater of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice yourreasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and (3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney reasonably accrues forinvestigating, preparing, and pursuing your claim in arbitration. The
arbitrator will determine the amounts.

ii.

Disputes involving more than $75,000. The AAA rules will govern payment offiling fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.

iii.

Disputes involving any amount. In any arbitration you commence, NF
Corporation will seek its AAA or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or your filingfees it reimbursed, only if the arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous or
brought for an improper purpose. In any arbitration NF Corporationcommences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. It
will not seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from you in any arbitration. Feesand expenses are not counted in determining how much a dispute involves.

h.

Claims or disputes must be filed within one year. To the extent permitted by law,
any claim or dispute under this agreement to which Section 2 applies must be
filed within one year in small claims court (Section 2.c) or in arbitration (Section
2.d). The one-year period begins when the claim or dispute first could be filed. Ifsuch a claim or dispute is not filed within one year, it is permanently barred.

i.

Severability. If the class action waiver in Section 2.e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a dispute, then Section 2 will not apply tothose parts. Instead, those parts will be severed and proceed in a court of law,with the remaining parts proceeding in arbitration. If any other provision ofSection 2 is found to be illegal or unenforceable, that provision will be severed

VII

ZA57630

with the remainder of Section 2 remaining in full force and effect.
j.

Third-Party Beneficiary. Microsoft Corporation is not a party to this agreement but
is a third-party beneficiary of your and the NF Corporation’s agreement to resolve
disputes through informal negotiation and arbitration. If your dispute is with
Microsoft, Microsoft agrees to do everything NF Corporation agrees to do in
Section 2, and you agree to do everything regarding Microsoft that Section 2
requires you to do regarding NF Corporation. Mail a Notice of Dispute with
Microsoft to Microsoft Corporation, ATTN: LCA ARBITRATION, One Microsoft Way,
Redmond, WA 98052-6399. You may commence an arbitration or small claims
court case against Microsoft in your county of residence or King County,
Washington.

3.

Choice of Law

The laws of the state or country where you live govern all claims and disputes concerning thesoftware or this agreement, including breach of contract claims and claims under state
consumer protection laws, unfair competition laws, implied warranty laws, for unjust
enrichment, and in tort, except that the FAA governs all provisions relating to arbitration. If
you acquired the software in any other country, the laws of that country apply. Thisagreement describes certain legal rights. You may have other rights, including consumer
rights, under the laws of your state or country. You may also have rights with respect to theparty from whom you acquired the software. This agreement does not change those otherrights if the laws of your state or country do not permit it to do so.
4.

Activationa.

More on how activation works. The software will notify you or NF Corporation, if
NF Corporation activates the software, whether the installed copy of the software
is properly licensed. During activation, the software will send information about
the software and your device to Microsoft. This information includes the version,
language, and product key of the software, the Internet protocol address of thedevice, and information derived from the hardware configuration of the device.
For more information about activation, seego.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=280262. If the licensed device is connected to theInternet, the software will automatically connect to Microsoft for activation. You
can also activate the software manually by Internet or telephone. In either case,Internet and telephone service charges may apply.

b.

Re-activation. Some changes to your device components or the software may
require re-activation of the software.

c.

Activation failure. During online activation, if the licensing or activation functionsof the software are found to be counterfeit, improperly licensed, or include

VIII

ZA57630

unauthorized changes, activation will fail and the software will attempt to repair
itself by replacing any tampered Microsoft software with genuine Microsoft
software. The software will notify you or NF Corporation if the installed copy ofthe software is improperly licensed or includes unauthorized changes. In addition,
you or NF Corporation may receive reminders to obtain a properly licensed copyof the software. You may not be able to obtain certain updates or upgrades fromMicrosoft if your copy of the software is found to be improperly licensed.
5.

Internet-Based Features; Privacy

Some software features use Internet protocols, which send to Microsoft (or its suppliers orservice providers) device information, such as your Internet protocol address, the type ofoperating system, browser and name and version of the software you are using, the language
code of the device where you installed the software, and other information described below,
in the Windows Privacy Statement at go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=280262, or in the
Windows Embedded user interface. Microsoft uses this information to make theInternet-based features available to you, in accordance with the Windows Privacy Statement
at go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=301572 and information that may be presented to you in
the Windows Embedded user interface. Some Internet-based features may be delivered andupdated at a later date if, for example, you acquire an application that relies on one of thoseservices, or to help make the software safer or more reliable. Internet features include, but are
not limited to the features described below, in the Windows 8.1Privacy Statement at
go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=301572 and the Windows Embedded user interface. NF
Corporation may have elected to turn on one or more of the following features in thelicensed device.
a.

Accelerators. When you click on or move your mouse over an Accelerator inInternet Explorer, any of the following may be sent to the applicable service
provider (which may not be Microsoft): the title and full web address or URL of thecurrent webpage, standard device information, and any content you have selected.
For more information, see go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=280122.

b.

Cookies. If you choose to use online features in the software, such as online Helpand Support, cookies may be set. To learn how to block, control and delete
cookies, please read the cookies section of the Privacy Statement at
go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=74170.

c.

Digital Certificates. The software uses digital certificates to confirm the identity ofInternet users sending X.509 standard encrypted information, to digitally sign files
and macros, and to verify the integrity and origin of the file contents. The software
may retrieve and update certificates and certificate revocation lists, and the list oftrusted certification authorities, over the Internet.

d.

Feedback Features. The Customer Experience Improvement Program automatically

IX

ZA57630

sends to Microsoft anonymous information about your hardware and how you
use this software. The Help Experience Improvement Program (HEIP) automaticallysends to Microsoft information about the version of Windows that your PC device
is running and about how you use Windows Help and Support, including queries
you enter when you search Windows Help and Support and any ratings or
feedback on the Help topics presented to you. Windows Error Reporting
automatically sends reports to Microsoft that describes which software
components had errors. These reports may include memory dumps. From
time-to-time, Microsoft will also download a small file to your device that permits
them to collect information about specific errors you have while using thesoftware. The data collected by these features helps Microsoft improve theirsoftware.
e.

IPv6 Network Address Translation (NAT) Traversal service (Teredo). Each time you
start your licensed device, Teredo will attempt to locate a public Internet Protocol
version 6 (IPv6) service on the Internet. This occurs automatically when yourlicensed device is connected to a public or private network, but does not occur onmanaged networks such as enterprise domains. If you use a program that requires
Teredo to use IPv6 connectivity, or if you configure your firewall to always enable
IPv6 connectivity, then Teredo will periodically contact the Microsoft Teredo
service over the Internet. The only information sent to Microsoft is standard
computer information and the name of the service requested (for example
teredo.ipv6.microsoft.com). The information sent from your device by Teredo isused to determine if your device is connected to the Internet and if it can locate apublic IPv6 service. Once the service is located, information is sent to maintain aconnection with the IPv6 service.

f.

Malicious Software Removal. The software may periodically scan for and remove
malware from your device, using the malicious software removal tool mostrecently downloaded to your device. After the scan completes and at regularintervals, a report will be sent to Microsoft with specific information about
malware detected, errors, and other information about your device. This
information is used to help protect your device from malicious software, as well as
to improve the software and other Microsoft products. You may disable thesoftware’s reporting functionality by following the instructions found atgo.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=241725.

g.

Network Awareness. This feature determines whether a system is connected to a
network by either passive monitoring of network traffic or active DNS or HTTP
queries. The query only transfers standard TCP/IP or DNS information for routing
purposes. You can switch off the active query feature through a registry setting.

h.

Plug and Play and Plug and Play Extensions. Your device may not have the drivers

X

ZA57630

needed to communicate with hardware that you connect to your device. If so, theupdate feature of the software can obtain and install the correct driver on yourdevice. An administrator can disable this update feature.
i.

Search Provider Update. The software will download an update to the data on
your device about search providers. This update upgrades your providers with thelatest features, such as new icons or search suggestions. This is a one-time update,but the software will try to perform the update several times if it does not
successfully download the update. For more information, seego.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=280122.

j.

SmartScreen Filter. If enabled, the SmartScreen Filter will check the addresses of
webpages and downloads you attempt to view against a frequently updated list of
webpages and downloads that have been reported to Microsoft as unsafe or
suspicious. SmartScreen will also check downloaded programs that you attempt torun against a list of commonly downloaded or run programs to help you makemore informed trust decisions. More information can be found by visiting theInternet Explorer Privacy Statement at go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=280122. By
enabling SmartScreen in either Windows or Internet Explorer, you consent to thisfeature, and you agree to use the SmartScreen Filter only in conjunction with
Windows or Internet Explorer. You may not, either manually or by enabling or
authorizing any software or service, copy, display, distribute, collect or store any
data provided by the SmartScreen Filter.

k.

Windows Defender. If turned on, Windows Defender will search your device formany types of malicious software (“malware”), including viruses, worms, bots,
rootkits, “spyware”, “adware,” and other potentially unwanted software. If you
choose the “recommended” security settings when you first start using thesoftware, such malware and other potentially unwanted software rated “high” or“severe” will automatically be removed. This removal may result in other software
on your device ceasing to work or your breaching a license to use that software. It
is possible that software that is not unwanted may be removed or disabled. If you
use Windows Defender and Windows Update, Windows Defender is regularly
updated through Windows Update.

l.

Windows digital rights management technology. Some content owners use
Windows digital rights management technology (DRM) to protect their copyrights
and other intellectual property, including by disabling the software’s ability to playprotected content if Windows DRM fails. You agree that Microsoft may include a
revocation list with the licenses.

m.

Windows Media Player. When you use Windows Media Player it checks with
Microsoft for compatible online music services in your region and new versions of
the player. You may only use Windows Media Player as described at
XI

ZA57630

go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=104605.
n.

Windows Update. If you use the Windows Update service in the software, updates
or downloads to the Windows Update service will be required for proper
functioning of the service, from time to time, and will be downloaded andinstalled without further notice to you.

o.

Windows Store for Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro Retail. NF Corporation
has disabled links to the Windows Store and you must not enable such links.

p.

Windows Store for Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro, Windows Embedded 8.1
Industry Pro Tablet, Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro Small Tablet. In addition
to the terms of this agreement for Internet-based features, you may only use theWindows Store under the terms available atgo.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=246694. Those terms also contain information
about Windows Notification Service. Windows apps or any preinstalled apps on
your device may use Windows Notification Service. You agree that notifications
may be sent to you as described in the Windows 8.1 Privacy Statement andWindows Store terms of service.

6.

Proof of License

If you acquired the software on the device, or on a disc or other physical media, your proof of
license is the genuine Microsoft certificate of authenticity label with the accompanying
genuine product key, and proof of purchase from a supplier of genuine Microsoft software. A
valid license may also include a Windows activation file installed on the device by NF
Corporation. If there is a COA or other Windows label, it must be affixed to the device orappear on the NF Corporation’s software packaging or peripherals when purchased. If you
receive an authenticity label separate from your device, it does not establish proof of license.
If you acquired and downloaded the software online, your proof of license is the genuine
Microsoft product key for the software that you received with your purchase, and your proofof purchase from an authorized electronic supplier of genuine Microsoft software. Proof ofpurchase may be subject to verification by your merchant’s records.
7.

Updates and Upgrades

You may only obtain updates or upgrades for the software from Microsoft or authorized
sources. Certain upgrades, support, and other services may be offered only to users of
genuine Microsoft software. For more information about Genuine Windows, seego.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=104612. To identify genuine Microsoft software, seehowtotell.com.

XII

ZA57630

8.

Fonts, Icons, Images, and Soundsa.

Font components. While the software is running, you may use its fonts to display
and print content. You may temporarily download the fonts to a printer or other
output device to print content, and you may embed fonts in content only as
permitted by the embedding restrictions in the fonts.

b.

Icons, images, and sounds. While the software is running, you may access and use
its icons, images, sounds, and media only from the licensed device. You may notshare the sample images, sounds and media provided with the software or use
them for any other purpose.

9.

.NET Framework

The software includes one or more components of the .NET Framework, which you may use
only as described at go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=66406, if you use the .NET Framework
components to conduct internal benchmark testing.
10.

H.264/AVC and MPEG-4 Visual Standards and VC-1 Video Standards

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC, THE VC-1, AND THE MPEG-4 PART 2 VISUALPATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSES FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A
CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE ABOVE STANDARDS (“VIDEO
STANDARDS”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC, VC-1, AND MPEG-4 PART 2 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE SUCH VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C SEE WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
11.

Adobe Flash Player

The software may include a version of Adobe Flash Player. You agree that your use of the
Adobe Flash Player is governed by the license terms for Adobe Systems Incorporated atgo.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=248532. Adobe and Flash are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
12.

Third Party Programs

This software contains certain third-party programs. You agree that your use of them isgoverned by the license terms provided with those programs.
13.

Not Fault Tolerant

The software is not fault tolerant. NF Corporation installed the software on the device and is
responsible for how it operates on the device.

XIII

ZA57630

14.

Support Services

Contact NF Corporation for support options. Refer to the support number provided with thedevice.
15.

Disclaimer of Warranty

The software is licensed “as-is.” You bear the risk of using it. Microsoft gives no express
warranties, guarantees or conditions. You may have additional consumer rights under yourlocal laws which this agreement cannot change. To the extent permitted under your local
laws, NF Corporation and Microsoft excludes the implied warranties of merchantability,
fitness for a particular purpose and non-infringement. For Australia only: You may havestatutory guarantees under the Australian Consumer Law and nothing in these terms is
intended to affect those rights.
16.

Limitation on and Exclusion of Remedies and Damages

You can recover from Microsoft and its suppliers only direct damages up to the amount
you paid for the software. You cannot recover any other damages, including
consequential, lost profits, special, indirect or incidental damages.
This limitation applies to·anything related to the software, services, content (including code) on third party
Internet sites, or third party programs; and·claims for breach of contract, breach of warranty, guarantee or condition, strict
liability, negligence, or other tort to the extent permitted by applicable law.

It also applies even if·

repair, replacement or a refund for the software does not fully compensate you for
any losses; or·Microsoft knew or should have known about the possibility of the damages.

Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages,
so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. They also may not apply to you
because your country may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental, consequential orother damages.
17.

Export Restrictions

You must comply with all domestic and international export laws and regulations that apply
to the software, which include restrictions on destinations, end users, and end use. For further
information on geographic and export restrictions, visit
go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=141397 and microsoft.com/exporting.

XIV

ZA57630

18.

Entire Agreement

This agreement (together with terms accompanying any software supplements, updates, andservices that are provided by NF Corporation, or Microsoft and that you use), and the terms
contained in web links listed in this agreement are the entire agreement for the software andany such supplements, updates, and services (unless Microsoft provides other terms withsuch supplements, updates, or services). You can review the terms at any of the links in thisagreement after your software is running by typing the URLs into your browser address bar,and you agree to do so. You agree, that for each service or included app, if any, that isgoverned by this agreement and also specific terms linked in this agreement, you will readthe terms for that service before using the service. You understand that by using the service,
you ratify this agreement and the linked terms. There are also informational links in thisagreement. The links containing terms that bind you and us are:·go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=301572 (Windows Embedded Industry 8.1
Privacy Statement)·

go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=280262 (Windows 8.1 Privacy Statement)·

go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=281874 (Arbitration Procedure)·go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=104605 (Windows Media Player)·go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=246694 (Windows Store Terms of Use)·go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=246338 (Microsoft Services Agreement)·

xbox.com/legal/livetou (Xbox LIVE Terms of Use)·go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=66406 (.NET Framework Terms)·

go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=248532 (Adobe Flash Player License Terms)

XV

ZA57630

(Blank)

XVI

ZA57630WARRANTYNF Corporation certifies that this product was thoroughly tested and inspected and found to meetits published specifications when it was shipped from our factory. In the unlikely event that you
experience an issue during use, please contact our company or agency of our company fromwhich you purchased the product.
All NF products are warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one
year from the date of shipment. During the warranty period, NF will repair the defective productwithout any charge for the parts and labor.
For repair service under warranty, the product must be returned to either NF or an agent
designated by NF. The Purchaser shall prepay all shipping cost, duties and taxes for the productto NF from another country, and NF shall pay shipping charges to return the product to thepurchaser.
This warranty shall not apply when corresponding to following particulars.
A) Failure caused by improper handling or use of the product in a manner that does notconform with the provisions of the Instruction Manual.
B) Failure or damage caused by transport, dropping, or other handling of the product after
purchase.
C) Failure caused by repair, adjustment, or modification of the product by a company,
organization, or individual not approved by NF.
D) Failure caused by abnormal voltage or the influence of equipment connected to thisproduct.
E) Failure caused by the influence of supply parts from the customer.
F) Failure caused by such as corrosion that originate in the use of causticity gas, organic
solvent, and chemical.
G) Failure caused by the insect or small animal that invaded from the outside.
H) Failure or damage caused by fire, earthquakes, flood damage, lightning, war, or otheruncontrollable accident.
I) Failure caused by the reason that was not able to be foreseen by the science andtechnology level when shipped from our company.
J) Replacement and replenishment of consumables such as batteries.

NF Corporation

Request for Repair
When a failure occurred and the product was found to be defective or you have any uncertainty,
please get in touch with NF Corporation or its authorized agent.
In such a case, let us know the model name (or product name), serial number (SERIAL No. givenon the nomenclature plate), and symptom and operating conditions as detail as possible.
Though we will make efforts to reduce the repair period, when five or more years have passed
since you purchased the product, it may take time due to, for instance, the out of stock of repair
parts.
Also, if the production of repair parts is discontinued, the product is extremely damaged, or the
product is modified, we may decline the repair.

WABUN: (DA00068819-004)

If there are any misplaced or missing pages, we will replace the manual.
Contact the sales representative.

NOTES
 Reproduction of the contents of this manual is forbidden by applicable laws.
 The contents of this manual may be revised without notice.
 Information provided in this manual is intended to be accurate and reliable. However,
we assume no responsibility for any damage regarding the contents of this manual.
 We assume no responsibility for influences resulting from the operations in thismanual.

Copyright 2019−2022, NF Corporation

ZA57630 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASICS)

NF Corporation
6-3-20, Tsunashima Higashi, Kohoku-ku, Yokohama
223-8508 JAPAN
Phone +81-45-545-8128

Fax +81-45-545-8187

http://www.nfcorp.co.jp/

NF Corporation
6-3-20, Tsunashima Higashi, Kohoku-ku, Yokohama 223-8508 JAPAN